Contents

Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 532
1 of 532

Summary of Content for Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual PDF

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1

1 Before driving Adjusting and operating features such as door locks, mirrors, and steering column.

2 When driving Driving, stopping and safe-driving information.

3 Interior fea- tures

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in- terior features for a comfortable driving experience.

4 Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it- yourself maintenance, and maintenance information.

5 When trouble arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat tire, or is involved in an accident.

6 Vehicle specifications Detailed vehicle information.

7 For owners Reporting safety defects for US owners, and seat belt and SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners

Index Alphabetical listing of information contained in this manual.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

2

1-1. Key information Keys ..................................... 22

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system................. 25 Wireless remote control ....... 38 Doors.................................... 43 Trunk .................................... 46

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats ........................... 53 Rear seats............................ 56 Head restraints..................... 58 Seat belts ............................. 60 Steering wheel ..................... 67 Anti-glare inside rear

view mirror.......................... 68 Outside rear view mirrors ..... 69

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows .................... 72

1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel tank cap .... 75

1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer

system ................................ 79 Alarm .................................... 82 Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.)............................... 86

1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture ......... 87 SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint System airbag) ................... 89

Front passenger occupant classification system......... 128

Child restraint systems ....... 137 Installing child restraints ..... 141

2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle .............. 152 Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles with a smart key system) ...................... 166

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system) ............ 175

Automatic transmission ...... 178 Manual Transmission ......... 185 Turn signal lever ................. 188 Parking brake ..................... 189 Horn.................................... 190

1 Before driving

2 When driving

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

3

2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters ............ 191 Indicators and warning

lights ................................. 194 Multi-information display

(monochrome display) ...... 200 Multi-information display

(color display) ................... 207

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch.................. 222 Fog light switch ................... 228 Windshield wipers and

washer .............................. 229

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control...................... 232 Rear view monitor

system .............................. 237 Driving assist systems ........ 245 Hill-start assist control......... 252

2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage ............. 256 Vehicle load limits ............... 260 Winter driving tips ............... 261 Trailer towing ...................... 265 Dinghy towing ..................... 266

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system.............................. 268

Automatic air conditioning system.............................. 275

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers ......................... 284

3-2. Using the audio system Using the AUX/USB port .... 286 Steering wheel audio

switches ........................... 287 Using the microphone ........ 288

3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights list ................. 289 Interior light ...................... 290

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features....... 291 Glove box ......................... 292 Bottle holders ................... 293 Cup holders/

console tray...................... 294

3 Interior features

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

4

3-5. Other interior features Sun visors .......................... 296 Vanity mirrors ..................... 297 Clock .................................. 298 Power outlets ..................... 299 Seat heaters....................... 301 Floor mat ............................ 303

4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ........... 308 Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior ............ 312 Cleaning and protecting

the Alcantara area.......... 316

4-2. Maintenance Maintenance

requirements .................... 318 General maintenance......... 320 Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M) programs.......................... 323

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions....................... 324

Hood ................................... 327 Positioning a floor jack........ 329 Engine compartment .......... 331 Tires.................................... 345 Tire inflation pressure ......... 353 Wheels................................ 357 Air conditioning filter ........... 360 Wireless remote control/

electronic key battery ....... 363 Checking and replacing

fuses................................. 367 Light bulbs .......................... 375

5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers............ 384 If your vehicle needs to

be towed........................... 385 If you think something

is wrong ............................ 393 Fuel pump shut off

system .............................. 394

4 Maintenance and care

5 When trouble arises

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

5

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................... 395

If a warning message is displayed........................... 407

If you have a flat tire............ 424 If the engine will not start .... 435 If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P.................... 438 If you lose your keys ........... 439 If the electronic key does

not operate properly.......... 440 If the battery is

discharged ........................ 444 If your vehicle overheats ..... 449 If the vehicle becomes

stuck ................................. 452 If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ........................ 454

6-1. Specifications Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 458 Fuel information.................. 470 Tire information .................. 474

6-2. Customization Customizable features........ 487

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ................ 492

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)........................ 493

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)........................ 496

Abbreviation list........................ 520

Alphabetical index .................... 521

What to do if... .......................... 529

6 Vehicle specifications

7 For owners

Index

6

Daytime running lights/parking lights P. 222

Pictorial index Exterior

Outside rear view mirrors P. 69

Front turn signal lights P. 188

Hood P. 327

Windshield wipers P. 229

Headlights P. 222

Front side marker lights P. 222

Front fog lights P. 228

7

Tires Rotation Replacement Inflation pressure Information

P. 345 P. 425 P. 353 P. 474

Rear window defogger P. 284

Trunk P. 46

Doors P. 43

Fuel filler door P. 75

Tail lights P. 222

Rear side marker lights P. 222

Turn signal lights P. 188

: If equipped

License plate lights P. 222

Rear view camera P. 237

8

Pictorial index Interior

Power outlet P. 299

Head restraints P. 58

Seat belts P. 60

SRS front passenger airbag P. 89

Cup holders Console tray

P. 294 P. 294

SRS side airbags P. 89

Front seats P. 53

Glove box P. 292

SRS curtain shield airbags P. 89Child restraint

anchor brackets P. 141

9

B

A

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror P. 68

Interior light P. 290

Vanity mirrors P. 297

Sun visors P. 296

Inside door lock buttons P. 44

Outside rear view mirror switch P. 69

Window lock switch P. 72

Power window switches P. 72

Door lock switch P. 43

Microphone P. 288

Rear view monitor P. 237

10

: If equipped

C

Shift lever P. 178, 185

Parking brake lever P. 189

VSC/TRAC off switch P. 246

TRACK switch P. 247

Power outlet P. 299

Shift lock override button P. 439

Driving pattern selector switch P. 180

Pictorial index Interior

Seat heater switches P. 301

11

Headlight switch Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 222 P. 188 P. 228

Gauges and meters Multi-information display

P. 191 P. 200, 207

Clock P. 298

Windshield wiper and washer switch P. 229

Emergency flasher switch P. 384

Tilt and telescopic steering lock release lever P. 67

Floor mat P. 303

Hood lock release lever P. 327

Fuel filler door opener P. 75

AUX port USB port

P. 286 P. 286

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system) P. 166

: If equipped

12

A

Air conditioning system P. 268

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch /rear window defogger switch P. 284

Pictorial index Instrument panel

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system

Air conditioning system P. 275

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers switch /rear window defogger switch P. 284

13

B

Paddle shift switches P. 181, 183

Cruise control switch P. 232

Horn SRS driver airbag

P. 190 P. 89

: If equipped

Audio remote control switches P. 287

Meter control switches P. 208

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system) P. 175

14

Pictorial index Instrument panel

C

Instrument panel light control dial P. 192

Trunk opener P. 46

15

For your information

Main Owners Manual

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equip- ment, including options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustration may differ from your vehicle in terms of color and equipment.

Noise from under vehicle after turning off the engine

Approximately five to ten hours after the engine is turned off, you may hear sound coming from under the vehicle for several minutes. This is the sound of a fuel evaporation leakage check and, it does not indicate a malfunction.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non-genuine spare parts and accessories for Toyota vehi- cles are currently available in the market. You should know that Toyota does not warrant these products and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non-genuine Toyota products. Mod- ification with non-genuine Toyota products could affect its performance, safety or durability, and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi- tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the modification may not be covered under warranty.

16

Installation of a mobile two-way radio system

The installation of a mobile two-way radio system in your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as:

Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection system Cruise control system Anti-lock brake system SRS airbag system Seat belt pretensioner system Be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precautionary measures or spe- cial instructions regarding installation of a mobile two-way radio system.

17

Vehicle data recordings

Your Toyota is equipped with several sophisticated computers that will record certain data, such as:

Accelerator status Brake status Vehicle speed The recorded data varies according to the vehicle grade level and options with which it is equipped. These computers do not record conversations or sounds, and only record images outside of the vehicle in certain situations.

Data Transmission Your vehicle may transmit the data recorded in these computers to Toyota without notification to you.

Data usage Toyota may use the data recorded in these computers to diagnose malfunc- tions, conduct research and development, and improve quality.

Toyota will not disclose the recorded data to a third party except:

With the consent of the vehicle owner or with the consent of the lessee if the vehicle is leased

In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern- ment agency

For use by Toyota in a lawsuit For research purposes where the data is not tied to a specific vehicle or

vehicle owner To learn more about the vehicle data collected, used and shared by

Toyota, please visit www.toyota.com/privacyvts/.

18

Event data recorder

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main pur- pose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicles systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:

How various systems in your vehicle were operating; Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fas-

tened; How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake

pedal; and, How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situ- ation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi- tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation. To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Disclosure of the EDR data

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a third party except when: An agreement from the vehicles owner (or the lessee for a leased vehicle)

is obtained In response to an official request by the police, a court of law or a govern-

ment agency For use by Toyota in a lawsuit However, if necessary, Toyota may: Use the data for research on vehicle safety performance Disclose the data to a third party for research purposes without disclosing

information about the specific vehicle or vehicle owner

19

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by your Toyota dealer before you scrap your vehicle.

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate. These components may include airbag, seat belt pretensioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

WARNING

General precautions while driving Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ- ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi- cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury. Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents. Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis- tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you, your occupants or others.

General precaution regarding childrens safety Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to have or use the key. Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral. There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with the windows or other features of the vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the vehicle can be fatal to children.

20

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

WARNING

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause death or serious injury to people. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the risk of death or serious injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against something which, if ignored, may cause damage to the vehicle or its equipment. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota and its equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means Do not, Do not do this, or Do not let this happen.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.) used to operate switches and other devices. Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g. a lid opens).

Before driving 1

21

1-1. Key information Keys ................................... 22

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system .............. 25 Wireless remote control ..... 38 Doors ................................. 43 Trunk.................................. 46

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats ......................... 53 Rear seats.......................... 56 Head restraints................... 58 Seat belts ........................... 60 Steering wheel ................... 67 Anti-glare inside rear

view mirror ....................... 68 Outside rear view

mirrors.............................. 69

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows .................. 72

1-5. Refueling Opening the fuel

tank cap ........................... 75

1-6. Theft deterrent system Engine immobilizer

system ............................. 79 Alarm.................................. 82 Theft prevention labels

(U.S.A.) ............................ 86

1-7. Safety information Correct driving posture....... 87 SRS airbag

(Supplemental Restraint System airbag)................. 89

Front passenger occupant classification system ...... 128

Child restraint systems..... 137 Installing child restraints... 141

22

1-1. Key information

Keys

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Vehicles without a smart key system Master keys

Operating the wireless remote control function (P. 38)

Valet key Key number plate

Vehicles with a smart key system Electronic keys Operating the smart key

system (P. 25) Operating the wireless

remote control function (P. 38)

Mechanical keys Key number plate

23

1-1. Key information

1

Before driving

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system)

To take out the mechanical key, slide the release lever and take the key out.

After using the mechanical key, store it in the electronic key. Carry the mechanical key together with the electronic key. If the electronic key battery is depleted or entry function does not operate prop- erly, you will need the mechanical key. (P. 441)

When required to leave the vehicles key with a parking attendant Turn the trunk opener main switch off as circumstances demand. (P. 47) On vehicles without a smart key system, provide the attendant with the valet key. On vehicles with a smart key system, remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with the electronic key only.

Key number plate Keep the plate in a safe place, not in the vehicle. In the event that a key (without a smart key system) or mechanical key (with a smart key system) is lost, a new key can be made at your Toyota dealer using the key number plate. (P. 440)

When riding in an aircraft When bringing a key with wireless remote control function onto an aircraft, make sure you do not press any buttons on the key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you are carrying the key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the aircraft.

24

1-1. Key information

NOTICE

To prevent key damage Observe the following: Do not drop the keys, subject them to strong shocks or bend them. Do not expose the keys to high temperatures for a long period of time. Do not get the keys wet or wash them in an ultrasonic washer etc. Do not attach metallic or magnetic materials to the keys or place the keys

close to such materials. Do not disassemble the keys. Do not attach a sticker or anything else to the surface of the key. Vehicles with a smart key system: Do not place the keys near objects that

produce magnetic fields, such as TVs, audio systems, induction cookers, or medical electrical equipment, such as low-frequency therapy equip- ment.

Carrying the electronic key on your person (vehicles with a smart key system) Carry the electronic key 3.9 in. (10 cm) or more away from electric appli- ances that are turned on. Radio waves emitted from electric appliances within 3.9 in. (10 cm) of the electronic key may interfere with the key, causing the key to not function properly.

In case of a smart key system malfunction or other key-related prob- lems (vehicles with a smart key system) Take your vehicle with all the electronic keys provided with your vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

When a vehicle key is lost If the key remains lost, the risk of vehicle theft increases significantly. Visit your Toyota dealer immediately with all remaining keys that were provided with your vehicle.

25

1

Before driving

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Smart key system (vehicles with a smart key system)

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket. (The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Unlocks and locks the doors (P. 26) Unlocks the trunk (P. 27) Starts the engine (P. 166)

Electronic key

Electronic key

Electronic key

26

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Unlocking and locking the doors

Grip the drivers door handle to unlock the door. Grip the passen- gers door handle to unlock all the doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on the back of the handle.

The door cannot be unlocked for 3 seconds after the door is locked.

Touch the lock sensor (the indentation on the side of the door handle) to lock the doors.

Check that the door is securely locked.

27

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Unlocking the trunk

Press the button to unlock the trunk.

Antenna location and effective range

Antenna location Antennas outside the cabin Antennas inside the cabin Antenna outside the trunk Antenna inside the trunk

28

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is detected)

When locking or unlocking the doors

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 1.3 - 2.6 ft. (0.4 - 0.8 m) of either of the outside door handles. (Only the doors detecting the key can be operated.)

When unlocking the trunk

The system can be operated when the electronic key is within about 1.3 - 2.6 ft. (0.4 - 0.8 m) of the trunk release button.

When starting the engine or changing ENGINE START STOP switch modes

The system can be operated when the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

29

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Operation signals A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

When the door cannot be locked by the lock sensor

Door lock buzzer If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

Alarms and warning indicators A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warning messages shown on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehi- cle and accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Take appropriate mea- sures in response to any warning message on the multi-information display. (P. 410, 414) The following table describes circumstances and correction procedures when only alarms are sounded.

Use your palm to touch the lock sensor.

30

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again. (How- ever, depending on the location of the electronic key, the key may be detected as being in the vehicle. In this case, the vehicle may be unlocked.)

Battery-saving function The battery-saving function will be activated in order to prevent the elec- tronic key battery and the vehicle battery from being discharged while the vehicle is not in operation for a long time. In the following situations, the smart key system may take some time to

unlock the doors. The electronic key has been left in an area of approximately 6 ft. (2 m)

of the outside of the vehicle for 10 minutes or longer. The smart key system has not been used for 5 days or longer.

If the smart key system has not been used for 14 days or longer, the doors cannot be unlocked at any door except the drivers door. In this case, take hold of the drivers door handle, or use the wireless remote control or the mechanical key, to unlock the doors.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm sounds once for 5 seconds

An attempt was made to lock the vehicle while a door was open.

Close all of the doors and lock the doors again.

Interior alarm sounds continu- ously

The ENGINE START STOP switch was turned to ACCESSORY mode while the drivers door was open (or the drivers door was opened while the ENGINE START STOP switch was in ACCES- SORY mode).

Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off and close the drivers door.

31

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Conditions affecting operation The smart key system uses weak radio waves. In the following situations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may be affected, preventing the smart key system, wireless remote control and engine immobilizer system from operating properly. (Way of coping P. 441) When the electronic key battery is depleted Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-

play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri- cal noise

When the electronic key is in contact with, or is covered by the following metallic objects Cards to which aluminum foil is attached Cigarette boxes that have aluminum foil inside Metallic wallets or bags Coins Hand warmers made of metal Media such as CDs and DVDs

When other wireless keys (that emit radio waves) are being used nearby When carrying the electronic key together with the following devices that

emit radio waves A portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other wireless com-

munication device Another vehicle's electronic key or a wireless key that emits radio

waves Personal computers or personal digital assistants (PDAs) Digital audio players Portable game systems

If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to the rear window

When the electronic key is placed near a battery charger or electronic devices

32

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Notes for the entry function Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection

areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases: The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,

near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or unlocked.

The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to the rear bumper center when the trunk is unlocked.

The electronic key is on the instrument panel, rear shelf or floor, in the door pockets or glove box, auxiliary box when the engine is started or ENGINE START STOP switch modes are changed.

Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the electronic key inside the vehicle.

As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may be locked or unlocked by anyone.

Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash when the electronic key is within the effective range. (The door will automatically be locked after approximately 60 seconds if the doors are not opened and closed.)

Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-

tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to unlock the doors.)

A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

33

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Notes for locking the doors Touching the door lock sensor while wearing gloves may delay or prevent

lock operation. Remove the gloves and touch the lock sensor again. When the lock operation is performed using the lock sensor, recognition

signals will be shown up to two consecutive times. After this, no recogni- tion signals will be given.

If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the elec- tronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto- len), and continue to wash the vehicle.

If the electronic key is inside the vehicle and a door handle becomes wet during a car wash, a buzzer will sound outside the vehicle. To turn off the alarm, lock all the doors.

The lock sensor may not work properly if it comes into contact with ice, snow, mud, etc. Clean the lock sensor and attempt to operate it again.

Notes for the unlocking function A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle may prevent the

doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door handle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling the door handle again.

Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door. Remove the gloves and touch the sensor on the back of the handle again.

If the door handle becomes wet when washing the vehicle while the elec- tronic key is within the effective range, the door may lock and unlock repeatedly. In this case, place the electronic key in a location 6 ft. (2 m) or more away from the vehicle (take care to ensure that the key is not sto- len), and continue to wash the vehicle.

If there is another electronic key in the detection area, it may take slightly longer to unlock the doors after the door handle is gripped.

34

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 6 ft.

(2 m) of the vehicle. The smart key system can be deactivated in advance. (P. 487)

Alarm Using the smart key system to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 82)

To operate the system properly Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not

get the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from the outside of the vehicle. Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate prop- erly. (The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention func- tion may not operate.)

Do not leave the electronic key inside the trunk. The key confinement prevention function may not operate, depending on the location of the key (close to a spare tire, the inside edge of the trunk), conditions (inside a metal bag, close to metallic objects) and the radio waves in the surrounding area. (P. 48)

If the smart key system does not operate properly Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the mechani-

cal key. (P. 441) Starting the engine:P. 442

35

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Electronic key battery depletion The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. If the battery charge becomes low, a buzzer will sound in the cabin and a

message will be displayed on the multi-information display when the engine is stopped. (P. 414)

As the electronic key always receives radio waves, the battery will become depleted even if the electronic key is not used. The following symptoms indicate that the electronic key battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 363) The smart key system or the wireless remote control does not operate. The detection area becomes smaller. The LED indicator on the key surface does not turn on.

To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key close to any of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field: TVs Personal computers Cellular phones, cordless phones and battery chargers Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones Induction cookers Table lamps

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 363

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the wireless

remote control or mechanical key. (P. 38, 441) Starting the engine and changing ENGINE START STOP switch

modes: P. 442 Stopping the engine: P. 444

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. smart key system) can be changed. (Customizable features: P. 487)

36

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Certification for smart key system For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAE FCC ID: HYQ14AHP FCC ID: Y8PSSPLF03 NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Opera- tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

37

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

WARNING

Caution regarding interference with electronic devices People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main- tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart key system antennas. (P. 27) The radio waves may affect the operation of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask your Toyota dealer for details, such as the frequency of radio waves and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if you should disable the entry function.

User of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pace- makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of such medical devices.

Ask your Toyota dealer for details for disabling the entry function.

38

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Wireless remote control

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi- cle.

Vehicles without a smart key system Locks both side doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks both side doors

Pressing the button unlocks the drivers door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Sounds the alarm (press and hold) Unlocks the trunk (press and hold)

Vehicles with a smart key system Locks both side doors

Check that the door is securely locked.

Unlocks both side doors

Pressing the button unlocks the drivers door. Pressing the button again within 3 seconds unlocks the other doors.

Unlocks the trunk (press and hold) Sounds the alarm (press and hold)

39

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Operation signals Doors: A buzzer sounds and the emergency flashers flash to indicate that

the doors have been locked/unlocked. (Locked: once; Unlocked: twice)

Trunk: A buzzer sounds to indicate that the trunk has been unlocked. Door lock buzzer (vehicles with a smart key system)

If an attempt to lock the doors is made when a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and lock the vehicle once more.

Panic mode Vehicles without a smart key system

Vehicles with a smart key system

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the wireless remote control.

When is pressed for longer than about one second, an alarm will sound intermittently and the vehicle lights will flash to deter any person from trying to break into or damage your vehicle. To stop the alarm, press any button on the electronic key.

40

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Vehicle finder function Vehicles without a smart key system

Vehicles with a smart key system

When the function is set, a buzzer (sounds once) and the emergency flash- ers (flash 3 times) are used to inform the driver of the vehicles location. Press 3 times within 5 seconds while within a circumference of approxi- mately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle. However, if the interval between the 3 presses is short, the system may not be activated. This setting must be custom- ized at your Toyota dealer.

When the function is set, a buzzer (sounds once) and the emergency flash- ers (flash 3 times) are used to inform the driver of the vehicles location. Press 3 times within 5 seconds while within a circumference of approxi- mately 30 ft. (10 m) from of the vehicle. However, if the interval between the 3 presses is short, the system may not be activated. This setting must be custom- ized at your Toyota dealer.

41

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Security feature If a door is not opened within approximately 60 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

Alarm (vehicles with a smart key system) Using the wireless remote control to lock the doors will set the alarm system. (P. 82)

Conditions affecting operation Vehicles without a smart key system The wireless remote control function may not operate normally in the follow- ing situations: When the wireless key battery is depleted Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-

play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri- cal noise

When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone or other wireless commu- nication devices

When the wireless key is in contact with, or is covered by a metallic object

When other wireless key (that emit radio waves) is being used nearby If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to

the rear window Vehicles with a smart key system P. 31

If the wireless remote control does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system) Locking and unlocking the doors, unlocking the trunk: Use the mechanical key. (P. 441)

Key battery depletion Vehicles without a smart key system If the wireless remote control function does not operate, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery when necessary. (P. 363) Vehicles with a smart key system P. 35

42

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

When the electronic key battery is fully depleted P. 363

Confirmation of the registered key number (vehicles with a smart key system) The number of keys already registered to the vehicle can be confirmed. Ask your Toyota dealer for details.

Customization that can be configured at your Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. wireless remote control system) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 487)

Certification for wireless remote control For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: HYQ23AAC FCC ID: HYQ12BEL NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Opera- tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

43

1

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Before driving

Doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function, wireless remote control, key or door lock switch.

Entry function (vehicles with a smart key system) P. 26

Wireless remote control P. 38

Key Turning the key operates the doors as follows:

Vehicles without a smart key system Locks drivers side door Unlocks drivers side door

Vehicles with a smart key system The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key. (P. 441)

Door lock switch Locks both side doors Unlocks both side doors

44

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Locking the doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position. Close the door.

Vehicles with a smart key system The door cannot be locked if the electronic key is left inside the vehi- cle.

The key may not be detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Inside lock button Locks the door Unlocks the door

STEP 1

STEP 2

45

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Window open/close function linked to door operation In order to make opening and closing the doors easier, completely closed windows are linked to door operations. Therefore, when a door is opened, its window opens slightly. When a door is closed, its window closes completely. However, if the battery has discharged or is disconnected, this function will not operate. (P. 449)

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting (vehicles with a smart key system) Use the wireless remote control or mechanical key. (P. 38, 441)

WARNING

To prevent an accident Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out, resulting in death or serious injury. Always use a seat belt. Always lock both side doors. Ensure that both side doors are properly closed. Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi- cle and it may result in serious injury or death.

46

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk

The trunk can be opened using the key, trunk opener, entry function or wireless remote control.

Opening the trunk from inside the vehicle Press and hold the opener switch to release the trunk lid.

Opening the trunk from outside the vehicle

Key (vehicles without a smart key system) Turn the master key clockwise to release the trunk lid.

Entry function (vehicles with a smart key system) P. 27

Wireless remote control P. 38

47

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

Canceling the trunk opener feature

To protect luggage stored in the trunk against theft, do the following:

Turn the main switch in the trunk off to disable the trunk opener.

On Off

Vehicles without a smart key sys- tem: The trunk lid can only be opened with the master key.

Vehicles with a smart key system: The trunk lid can only be opened with the mechanical key.

48

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

Trunk light The trunk light turns on when the trunk is opened.

Function to prevent the trunk being locked with the electronic key inside (vehicles with a smart key system) When all doors are being locked, closing the trunk lid with the electronic

key left inside the trunk will sound an alarm. In this case, the trunk lid can be opened using the entry function.

Even when the spare electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors locked, the key confinement prevention function can be activated so the trunk can be opened. In order to prevent theft, take all electronic keys with you when leaving the vehicle.

Even when the electronic key is put in the trunk with all the doors are locked, the key may not be detected depending on the places and the surrounding radio wave conditions. In this case, the key confinement pre- vention function cannot be activated, causing the doors to lock when the trunk is closed. Make sure to check where the key is before closing the trunk.

The key confinement prevention function cannot be activated if any one of the doors is unlocked. In this case, open the trunk using the trunk opener.

Internal trunk release lever

Using the mechanical key (vehicles with a smart key system) The trunk can be also opened using the mechanical key. (P. 441)

Which key to the vehicle is to leave with a parking attendant after dis- abling the trunk opener main switch P. 23

The trunk lid can be opened by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever located on the inside of the trunk lid. The lever will continue to glow for some time after the trunk lid is closed.

49

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

WARNING

Caution while driving Keep the trunk lid closed while driving.

If the trunk lid is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug- gage in the trunk may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident. In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri- ous health hazard. Make sure to close the trunk lid before driving.

Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the trunk lid is fully closed. If the trunk lid is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving, caus- ing an accident.

Never let anyone sit in the trunk. In the event of sudden braking or a colli- sion, they are susceptible to death or serious injury.

When children are in the vehicle Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Do not allow children to play in the trunk.

If a child is accidentally locked in the trunk, they could suffer from heat exhaustion, suffocation or other injuries.

Do not allow a child to open or close the trunk lid. Doing so may cause the trunk lid to operate unexpectedly, or cause the childs hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing trunk lid.

50

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

WARNING

Using the trunk Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in seri- ous injury. Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the trunk lid before

opening it. Failure to do so may cause the trunk lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

When opening or closing the trunk lid, thoroughly check to make sure the surrounding area is safe.

If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that the trunk is about to open or close.

Use caution when opening or closing the trunk lid in windy weather as it may move abruptly in strong wind.

The trunk lid may suddenly shut if it is not opened fully. It is more difficult to open or close the trunk lid on an incline than on a level surface, so beware of the trunk lid unexpectedly opening or closing by itself. Make sure that the trunk lid is fully open and secure before using the trunk.

51

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

1

Before driving

WARNING

Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk lid. Such additional weight on the trunk lid may cause the lid to suddenly shut again after it is opened.

Trunk lid damper stays Do not pull on or disassemble the trunk lid damper stays, or dispose of them in a fire. Illustrations on the trunk lid damper stays indicate the following:

When closing the trunk lid, observe the following precautions: Take extra care to prevent your

fingers etc. from being caught. Vehicles without a rear spoiler Make sure to press the trunk lid

lightly on its outer surface. Vehicles with a rear spoiler Do not place your hand(s)

between the rear spoiler and trunk lid when closing the trunk lid.

To close the trunk lid, press the rear spoiler on either of the por- tions .

: Do not pull

: Do not disassemble

: Do not dispose of in fire

52

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors and trunk

NOTICE

Trunk damper stays The trunk lid is equipped with damper stays that hold the trunk lid in place. Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause damage to trunk damper stays, resulting in a malfunction. Do not attach any foreign objects such as stickers, plastic sheets and

adhesives to damper stay rods. Do not touch damper stay rods with gloves or other fabric items. Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota parts to the trunk

lid. Do not apply lateral force to damper stays or place your hand on it.

53

1

Before driving

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Seat position adjustment lever Seatback angle adjustment lever Vertical height adjustment lever (drivers side only) Seatback fold strap

54

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Getting in and out of the rear seats

To get in and out of the rear seats, use the seatback angle adjust- ment lever or seatback fold strap.

Before getting in or out of the rear seats Release the seat belt from the seat belt guide. (P. 61)

Getting in the rear seats Lift the seatback angle adjust- ment lever.

The seatback will fold forward.

Front passenger seat only: The seat can be slid forward and backward.

Getting out of the rear seats Pull the seatback fold strap.

The seatback will fold forward.

Front passenger seat only: The seat can be slid forward and backward.

After getting in or out of the rear seats Return the seatback to the upright position until the seat locks.

Front passenger seat only: The seat will lock in position at the point where the seatback reaches the upright position.

Seat dust cover Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur- chase before using the seat.

55

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

WARNING

Seat adjustment To reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt during a collision, do not

recline the seat more than necessary. If the seat is too reclined, the lap belt may slide past the hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen, or your neck may contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury in the event of an accident. Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect- edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position. Take care not to hit passengers with the seat.

When sliding the seat rearward, make sure not to squash the legs of the rear passengers.

When returning the seatback upright, perform seatback angle adjustment while holding down the seatback.

Do not pull on or use the seat belt guide to adjust or fold the front seat. Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism. When driving the vehicle

Never operate the seatback angle adjustment lever or seatback fold strap. Doing so could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Getting in and out of the rear seats When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to get your hands,

legs, etc. squashed in the movable or connecting parts. When getting in or out of the rear seats, make sure not to trip on the seat

rails. After getting in or out of the rear seats, always make sure the front seat is

locked in position. When operating the front seat from the rear seat

Make sure that no passenger is seated in the front seat.

56

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Rear seats

Seat dust cover Always remove the seat dust cover that may be attached at the time of pur- chase before using the seat.

WARNING

When folding the rear seatbacks down Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Do not fold the seatbacks down while driving. Stop the vehicle on level ground, set the parking brake and shift the shift

lever to P (automatic transmission) or N (manual transmission).

The seatbacks of the rear seats can be folded down.

Pull the seatback lock release straps in the trunk for the seat- back you wish to fold down.

To return the seatbacks to its original position, lift it up until it locks.

57

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit on a folded seatback or in the trunk while driv- ing.

Do not allow children to enter the trunk. After returning the rear seatback to the upright position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught in the seatback. Before using the rear seat belts

Push the rear seatback and then check that it is securely locked in position by lightly pushing it back and forth. If the seatback is not securely locked, the red portion of the seatback lock indicator will be visible. Make sure that the red portion is not visible.

Always make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the seatback or twisted in one of the hooks that secure the seatback. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to not be fastened correctly or to become ineffective in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury.

58

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Head restraints

Removing the head restraints

Installing the head restraints

Head restraints are provided for front seats.

Up

Pull the head restraints up.

Down

Push the head restraint down while pushing the lock release button.

Lock release button

Pull the head restraint up while pressing the lock release button.

Align the head restraint with the installa- tion holes and push it down to the lock position. Press and hold the lock release button when lowering the head restraint.

59

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

Adjusting the height of the head restraints

WARNING

Head restraint precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat. Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times. After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure

they are locked in position. Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

Make sure that the head restraints are adjusted so that the center of the head restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

60

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv- ing the vehicle.

Correct use of the seat belts

Extend the shoulder belt so that it comes fully over the shoulder, but does not come into contact with the neck or slide off the shoul- der.

Position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips.

Adjust the position of the seatback. Sit up straight and well back in the seat.

Do not twist the seat belt.

Fastening and releasing the seat belt Fasten the seat belt

Push the plate into the buckle until a click sound is heard.

Release the seat belt

Press the release button.

Release button

61

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

Front seat belt guide

To enable the seat belt to be easily extended, pass the seat belt through the guide.

When getting in or out of the rear seats, release the seat belt from the guide.

Seat belt pretensioners (front seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat belt to quickly restrain the occu- pant by retracting the seat belt when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe frontal or side collision or a vehicle roll- over.

The pretensioner may not acti- vate in the event of a minor frontal or side impact or a rear impact.

62

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Emergency locking retractor (ELR) The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to extend so that you can move around fully.

Automatic locking retractor (ALR) When a passenger's shoulder belt is completely extended and then retracted even slightly, the belt is locked in that position and cannot be extended. This feature is used to hold the child restraint system (CRS) firmly. To free the belt again, fully retract the belt and then pull the belt out once more. (P. 141)

Child seat belt usage The seat belts of your vehicle are principally designed for persons of adult size. Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 137)

When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle's seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 60 regarding seat belt usage.

Seat belt pretensioners Seatbelt pretensioners are not designed to activate in a rear impact or

minor frontal or side impact. The following four components operate simultaneously when the vehicle

is involved in a rollover accident. Seat belt pretensioner for driver Seat belt pretensioner for front passenger SRS curtain shield airbag for drivers seat side SRS curtain shield airbag for front passengers seat side

63

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

The following four components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is subjected to a severe frontal collision. Seat belt pretensioner for driver Seat belt pretensioner for front passenger SRS front airbag for driver SRS front airbag for front passenger*

*: This does not operate while the occupant classification system deter- mines to deactivate the airbag operation. For details, refer to Front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbag (P. 97)

The following two components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is subjected to a severe collision on the drivers seat side of the vehicle. Seat belt pretensioner for driver Side airbag for driver

The following two components operate simultaneously when the vehicle is subjected to a severe collision on the front passengers seat side of the vehicle. Seat belt pretensioner for front passenger Side airbag for front passenger

Pretensioners are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. In the event that a pretensioner is activated, both the drivers and front passen- gers seat belt retractor assemblies must be replaced only by Toyota dealer. When replacing seat belt retractor assemblies for the front seat- ing positions, use only genuine Toyota parts equipped with a force limiter.

If either front seat belt does not retract or cannot be pulled out due to a malfunction or activation of the pretensioner, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

If the front seat belt retractor assembly or surrounding area has been damaged, contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it has seat belt pretensioners by alerting the buyer to the contents of this section.

Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli- sions.

64

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

WARNING

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. Wearing a seat belt

Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt. Always wear a seat belt properly. Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt

for more than one person at once, including children. Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always

use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system. To achieve a proper seating position, do not recline the seat more than

necessary. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting up straight and well back in the seats.

Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm. Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way. (P. 60) Women who are pregnant should position the lap belt as low as possible over the hips in the same manner as other occu- pants. Extend the shoulder belt com- pletely over the shoulder and position the belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact over the rounding of the abdominal area. If the seat belt is not worn properly, not only the pregnant woman, but also the fetus could suffer death or serious injury as a result of sudden braking or a colli- sion.

65

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

WARNING

People with a medical condition Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a childs neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

Seat belt pretensioners If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at your Toyota dealer.

66

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

WARNING

Seat belt damage and wear Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door. Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Replace a damaged seat belt immediately. Damaged seat belts can- not protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

Ensure that the belt and plate are locked and the belt is not twisted. If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been involved in a serious accident, even if there's no obvious damage.

Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by your Toyota dealer. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it from operating properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

When using the seat belt guide Always make sure that the belt is not twisted, and runs freely through the

guide. Regardless of whether the guide is used or not, always secure the seat

belt guide button. Do not hang from or pull the guide forcefully.

Before using the rear seat belts

Always make sure that the seat belt is not caught in the seatback or twisted in one of the hooks that secure the seatback. Failure to do so may cause the seat belt to not be fastened correctly or to become ineffective in a collision, resulting in death or serious injury.

67

1

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Steering wheel

WARNING

Caution while driving Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an accident, and resulting in death or serious injury.

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

Hold the steering wheel and push the lever down.

Adjust to the ideal position by moving the steering wheel horizontally and vertically.

After adjustment, pull the lever up to secure the steering wheel.

STEP 1

STEP 2

68

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Automatic anti-glare function Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced. When the shift lever is shifted to R and a rear view image is displayed on the rear view monitor, the automatic anti-glare function will be disabled.

To prevent sensor error

WARNING

Caution while driving Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving. Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

The rear view mirrors position can be adjusted to enable sufficient confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver's seating posture.

To ensure that the sensors operate prop- erly, do not touch or cover them.

69

1

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

Outside rear view mirrors

Mirror angle can be adjusted using the switch.

Select a mirror to adjust.

Left Right

Adjust the mirror.

Up Right Down Left

STEP 1

STEP 2

70

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Folding the mirrors

Push the mirror back in the direc- tion of the vehicles rear.

The mirrors can be adjusted when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers. Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror defoggers. (P. 284)

71

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

1

Before driving

WARNING

When driving the vehicle Observe the following precautions while driving. Failure to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. Do not drive with the mirrors folded. Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving. When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your hand caught by the moving mirror.

When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and burn you.

72

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

Power windows

Window lock switch

Press the switch down to lock the passenger window glasses.

Use this switch to prevent chil- dren from accidentally opening or closing a passenger window.

The power windows can be opened and closed using the switches.

Operating the switch moves the windows as follows:

Closing One-touch closing* Opening One-touch opening*

*: Pushing the switch in the opposite direction will stop win- dow travel partway.

73

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

1

Before driving

The power windows can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

Operating the power windows after turning the engine off Vehicles without a smart key system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the engine switch is turned to the ACC or LOCK position. They can- not, however, be operated once either door is opened. Vehicles with a smart key system The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off. They cannot, however, be operated once either door is opened.

Jam protection function If an object becomes caught between the window and the body, window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

When the power window does not close normally If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot be closed, close all the doors and perform the following operations using the power window switch on the relevant door.

Vehicles without a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the engine switch is turned to the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system: After stopping the vehicle, the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode. Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position two consecutive times. Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position once again and continue holding for 1 second or more after the win- dow closes completely.

If you push the power window switch to the opening position while the win- dow is moving, start again from the beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

74

1-4. Opening and closing the windows

WARNING

Closing the windows Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. The driver is responsible for all the power window operations, including the

operation for the passengers. In order to prevent accidental operation, especially by a child, do not let a child operate the power windows. It is possible for children and other passengers to have body parts caught in the power window. Also, when riding with a child, it is recommended to use the window lock switch. (P. 72)

Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

When exiting the vehicle, turn the engine switch (vehicles without a smart key system) or the ENGINE START STOP switch (vehicles with a smart key system) off, carry the key and exit the vehicle along with the child. There may be accidental operation, due to mischief, etc., that may possi- bly lead to an accident.

Jam protection function Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection

function. The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window fully closes.

75

1

Before driving

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap:

Before refueling the vehicle Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch

off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off and ensure that all the doors and windows are closed.

Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 76)

Opening the fuel tank cap Pull up the opener to open the fuel filler door.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly to open.

STEP 1

STEP 2

76

1-5. Refueling

Closing the fuel tank cap

After refueling, turn the fuel tank cap until you hear a click. Once the cap is released, it will turn slightly in the opposite direction.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the back of the fuel filler door.

STEP 3

Fuel types Unleaded gasoline (octane rating of 93 [98 RON] or higher) If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.

77

1-5. Refueling

1

Before driving

WARNING

Refueling the vehicle Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Do not handle fuel indoors. After exiting the vehicle and before opening the fuel door, touch an

unpainted metal surface to discharge any static electricity. It is important to discharge static electricity before refueling because sparks resulting from static electricity can cause fuel vapors to ignite while refueling.

Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it. A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened. Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap. In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause injury.

Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their body to come close to an open fuel tank.

Do not allow anyone to approach the area of the vehicle near the fuel filler pipe while refueling is in progress.

Do not inhale vaporized fuel. Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle. Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically charged. This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition hazard.

78

1-5. Refueling

WARNING

When refueling Observe the following precautions to prevent fuel overflowing from the fuel tank: Securely insert the fuel nozzle into the fuel filler neck Stop filling the tank after the fuel nozzle automatically clicks off Do not top off the fuel tank Observe other precautions that are posted at the service station. Turn the cap to the right until it clicks to ensure that it is fully tightened. If

the cap is not securely tightened, fuel spillage could occur in the event of an accident, creating a fire hazard.

When replacing the fuel cap Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your vehicle. Doing so may cause a fire or other incident which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

Refueling Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Doing so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the emission control system to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the vehicle's painted surface.

Never add any cleaning agents to the fuel tank. The addition of a cleaning agent may cause damage to the fuel system.

Immediately put fuel in the tank whenever the low fuel warning light illumi- nates. Engine misfires as a result of an empty tank could cause damage to the engine.

79

1

Before driving

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle's keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in the vehicle's on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

This system is designed to help prevent vehicle theft but does not guarantee absolute security against all vehicle thefts.

Vehicles without a smart key system The indicator light flashes after the key has been removed from the engine switch to indi- cate that the system is operat- ing.

The indicator light stops flash- ing after the registered key has been inserted into the engine switch to indicate that the sys- tem has been canceled.

Vehicles with a smart key system The indicator light flashes after the ENGINE START STOP switch has been turned off to indicate that the system is operating.

The indicator light stops flash- ing after the ENGINE START STOP switch has been turned to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode to indicate that the system has been canceled.

80

1-6. Theft deterrent system

When the vehicle cannot be started with the registered key (vehicles without a smart key system) Remove the key and try again.

System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction If the key is in contact with a metallic object If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle Certification for engine immobilizer system (vehicles without a smart

key system) For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: MOZRI-38BFH This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Opera- tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

81

1-6. Theft deterrent system

1

Before driving

Certification for engine immobilizer system (vehicles with a smart key system) For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. FCC ID: Y8PSSPIMB03 This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ence, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the users authority to operate the equipment. For vehicles sold in Canada NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Opera- tion is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compromettre le fonctionnement.

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

82

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Alarm

: If equipped

The alarms default setting is set to off. To use the alarm, perform the activating the alarm system procedures.

The system sounds the alarm and flashes the lights when forcible entry is detected.

Triggering of the alarm The alarm is triggered when a locked door or the trunk is unlocked or opened in any way other than using the entry func- tion or wireless remote control while the alarm is set.

Setting the alarm system Close the doors and/or trunk and perform one of the following:

Lock the doors using the entry function.

Lock the doors using the wireless remote control.

Lock the doors from the outside without using a key. (P. 44)

The system will be set auto- matically after 30 seconds or more elapse.

The indicator light changes from being on to flashing when the system is set.

83

1-6. Theft deterrent system

1

Before driving

Activating/deactivating the alarm system

Check that both side doors and the trunk are closed. Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode.

Open the drivers door while pressing and holding on the door lock switch and con- tinue to press for approxi- mately 10 seconds after the drivers door has opened.

The alarm system changes between activated and deacti- vated as follows.

Deactivating or stopping the alarm Perform one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm:

Unlock the doors using the entry function.

Unlock the doors using the wireless remote control.

Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped after a few seconds.)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Alarm status Horn Multi-information display

Deactivated Sounds twice AL oF

Activated Sounds once AL on

84

1-6. Theft deterrent system

System maintenance The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

Items to check before locking the vehicle To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure of the following. Nobody is in the vehicle. The windows are closed before the alarm is set. No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

Opening and closing the trunk If the alarm setting operations are performed with the trunk left open, the

alarm will not be set. After closing the trunk, the alarm is set after 30 sec- onds or more elapse.

When the trunk is unlocked using the entry function or wireless remote control while the alarm is set, the alarm goes into standby mode. After closing the trunk, the alarm is set again after 30 seconds or more elapse.

Triggering of the alarm The alarm may be triggered in the following situations. Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.

A person inside the vehicle opens a door or the trunk.

85

1-6. Theft deterrent system

1

Before driving

When the battery is disconnected Be sure to deactivate the alarm system. If the battery is disconnected before deactivating the alarm system, the alarm may be triggered when the battery is reconnected.

Customization that can be configured at your Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. alarm system) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 487)

NOTICE

To ensure the system operates correctly Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

The battery is recharged or replaced when the vehicle is locked.

86

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Theft prevention labels (U.S.A.)

These labels are attached to the vehicle to reduce vehicle theft by facilitating the tracing and recovery of parts from sto- len vehicles. Do not remove under penalty of law.

87

1

Before driving

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in the seat. (P. 53) Adjust the position of the seat forward or backward to ensure the pedals can be reached and easily depressed to the extent required. (P. 53) Adjust the seatback so that the controls are easily oper- able. (P. 53) Adjust the tilt and telescopic positions of the steering wheel to allow easy opera- tion and to ensure the air- bag is facing your chest. (P. 67) Lock the head restraint in place with the center of the head restraint closest to the top of your ears. (P. 58) Wear the seat belt correctly. (P. 60)

88

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

While driving Do not adjust the position of the driver's seat.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

Do not place anything under the front seats. Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci- dent resulting in serious injury or death. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

Adjusting the seat position Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving seat. Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury. Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

89

1

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

SRS airbag (Supplemental Restraint System airbag)

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the risk of death or serious injury.

SRS: This stands for supplemental restraint system. This name is used because the airbag system supplements the vehicles seat belts.

Models with SRS airbags and seat belts for driver, front pas- senger, and rear passengers Your vehicle is equipped with a supplemental restraint system in addition to a seat belt at each front seating positions and each rear seating positions. The supplemental restraint system (SRS) con- sists of six airbags. The configurations are as follows.

90

1-7. Safety information

When you sell your vehicle When you sell your vehicle, we urge you to explain to the buyer that it is equipped with SRS airbags by alerting the buyer to the applicable section in this Owners Manual.

Drivers and front passengers frontal airbags Drivers and front passengers side airbags Curtain shield airbags (for driver, front passenger, and rear pas- sengers)

These SRS airbags are designed only as a supplement to the pri- mary protection provided by the seat belt. The system also controls front seat belt pretensioners. For opera- tion instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt preten- sioner, refer to Seat belt pretensioners. (P. 61)

91

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

SRS airbag To obtain maximum protection in the event of an accident, the driver and

all passengers in the vehicle should always wear seat belts when the vehi- cle is moving. The SRS airbag is designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat belt. It does not eliminate the need to fasten seat belts. In combination with the seat belts, it offers the best combined protection in case of a serious accident. Not wearing a seat belt increases the chance of severe injury or death in a crash even when the vehicle has the SRS airbag. For instructions and precautions concerning the seat belt system, refer to Seat belts. (P. 60)

Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the SRS airbag. Because the SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed - faster than the blink of an eye - and force to protect in high speed collisions, the force of an airbag can injure an occupant whose body is too close to SRS airbag. It is also important to wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can result when the SRS airbag contacts an occupant not in proper position such as one thrown forward during pre-accident braking. Even when properly positioned, there remains a possibility that an occu- pant may suffer minor injury such as abrasions and bruises to the face or arms because of the SRS airbag deployment force.

The SRS airbags deploy with considerable speed and force. Occupants who are out of proper position when the SRS airbag deploys could suffer very serious injuries. Because the SRS airbag needs enough space for deployment, the driver should always sit upright and well back in the seat as far from the steering wheel as practical while still maintaining full vehi- cle control and the front passenger should move the seat as far back as possible and sit upright and well back in the seat.

Do not place any objects over or near the SRS airbag cover or between you and the SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag deploys, those objects could interfere with its proper operation and could be propelled inside the vehicle and cause injury.

92

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

SRS airbag

Put children aged 12 and under in the rear seat properly restrained at all times. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable speed and force and can injure or even kill children, especially if they are 12 years of age and under and are not restrained or improperly restrained. Because children are lighter and weaker than adults, their risk of being injured from deployment is greater. For that reason, we strongly recom- mend that ALL children (including those in child seats and those that have out- grown child restraint devices) sit in the REAR seat properly restrained at all times in a child restraint device or in a seat belt, whichever is appropriate for the child's age, height and weight. Secure ALL types of child restraint devices (including forward facing child seats) in the REAR seats at all times. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating positions. For instructions and precautions con- cerning the child restraint system, refer to Child restraint systems. (P. 137)

93

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

SRS airbag NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT

SEAT. DOING SO RISKS SERIOUS INJURY OR DEATH TO THE CHILD BY PLACING THE CHILDS HEAD TOO CLOSE TO THE SRS AIRBAG.

Never allow a child to stand up, or to kneel on the front passengers seat, or never hold a child on your lap or in your arms. The SRS airbag deploys with considerable force and can injure or even kill the child.

When the SRS airbag deploys, some smoke will be released. This smoke could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. If you or your passengers have breathing prob- lems after SRS airbag deploys, get fresh air promptly.

A deploying SRS airbag releases hot gas. Occupants could get burned if they come into direct contact with the hot gas.

94

1-7. Safety information

SRS airbag system components

Front sub sensor (right-hand side) SRS warning light Frontal airbag module (driver's side) (two-stage) Front passengers frontal air- bag ON and OFF indicator (center of instrument panel) Frontal airbag module (front passengers side) (two- stage) Front passengers occupant detection control module Door impact sensor (right- hand side) Curtain shield airbag mod- ule (right-hand side) Airbag wiring Side airbag module (front passengers side)

Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side) Curtain shield airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side) Seat belt pretensioner (front passengers side) Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats) Front passengers occupant classification system sensor Seat belt buckle switch (front passengers side) Seat belt pretensioner (drivers side) Curtain shield airbag sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side)

95

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Your vehicle is equipped with ADVANCED AIRBAGS designed based on US motor vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The airbag sys- tem controls airbag deployment power for the driver and front pas- senger. The front passenger's airbag system consists of the front passenger occupant detection control module etc.

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag control module. The airbag control module consists of an airbag sensor.

In certain types of severe front or side impacts, the SRS airbag sys- tem triggers the airbag inflators. A chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occupants.

Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side) Side airbag module (drivers side) Door impact sensor (left- hand side)

Airbag control module (including impact sensors and rollover sensors) Front sub sensor (left-hand side) Curtain shield airbag mod- ule (left-hand side)

If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate) Slight abrasions, burns, bruising etc., may be sustained from SRS air-

bags, due to the extremely high speed deployment (inflation) by hot gases.

A loud noise and white powder will be emitted. Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)

as well as the front seats, parts of the front and rear pillars, and roof side rails, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag itself may also be hot.

The windshield may crack.

96

1-7. Safety information

Toyota advanced frontal airbag system

Your vehicle is equipped with a Toyota advanced frontal airbag sys- tem that complies with the new advanced frontal airbag requirements in the amended Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) No. 208. The Toyota advanced frontal airbag system automatically determines the deployment force of the drivers SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment as well as whether or not to activate the front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag and, if activated, the deployment force of the SRS frontal airbag at the time of deployment. Your vehicle has warning labels on the drivers and front passengers sun visors beginning with the phrase EVEN WITH ADVANCED AIR BAGS and a tag attached to the glove box lid beginning with the phrase Even with Advanced Air Bags. Make sure that you carefully read the instructions on the warning labels and tag. Always wear your seat belt. The Toyota advanced frontal airbag sys- tem is a supplemental restraint system and must be used in combina- tion with a seat belt. All occupants should wear a seat belt or be seated in an appropriate child restraint system.

The drivers SRS frontal airbag is stowed in the center portion of the steering wheel. The front passengers SRS frontal airbag is stowed near the top of the dashboard under an SRS AIRBAG mark.

In a moderate to severe frontal collision, the following components deploy.

SRS frontal airbag for driver

SRS frontal airbag for front passenger

These components supplement the seat belts by reducing the impact to the occupants head and chest.

97

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Drivers SRS frontal airbag The drivers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator oper- ates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. Have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if the SRS warning light illuminates. NOTE The drivers SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not con- trolled by the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system.

Front passengers SRS frontal airbag The front passengers SRS frontal airbag uses a dual stage inflator. The inflator operates in different ways depending on the severity of impact. The occupant classification system sensor is installed under the seat uphol- stery and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant classification system determines whether the front passengers SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not. The occupant classification system may not inflate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is normal. In this case, although the front passengers SRS frontal airbag does not operate, the front passengers seat belt pretensioner operates with the drivers seat belt pretensioner. For details about the seat belt preten- sioner, refer to Seat belt pretensioners. (P. 61) Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may prevent the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system from functioning correctly or cause the sys- tem to fail. Do not apply any strong impact to the front passengers seat. Do not spill liquid on the front passengers seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it

off immediately. Do not remove or disassemble the front passengers seat. Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a

genuine Toyota accessory under the front passengers seat. Do not place anything (shoes, umbrella, etc.) under the front passengers

seat. Do not place a magnet near the seat belt buckle.

98

1-7. Safety information

If the seat belt buckle switch and/or front passengers occupant classification system have failed, the SRS warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if the SRS warning light illumi- nates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper function of the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system. Have your vehicle inspected at your Toyota dealer. Do not use the front passengers seat while driving the vehicle to your Toyota dealer. NOTE The front passengers SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not controlled by the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system.

Passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators P. 128

Occupant classification system The occupant classification system sensor is installed under the seat uphol- stery and monitors the physique and posture of the front passenger. Using this information, the occupant classification system determines whether the front passengers SRS frontal airbag should be deployed or not. If the front passengers seat cushion is wet, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deployment. If the seat cushion is wet, the front passenger should stop sitting on the front passengers seat. Wipe off liquid from the seat immediately, let the seat dry naturally and then check the SRS warning light as follows. If the SRS warning light illuminates, keep the seat dry until the warning

light turns off. If the SRS warning light stays on even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passengers seat and have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

If the SRS warning light does not illuminate, check that the front passen- gers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators work properly. If the indicators do not work properly, do not allow anyone to sit on the front passengers seat and have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

99

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Also, if luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passengers seat, this may adversely affect the ability of the system to determine deploy- ment. This may prevent the front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators from working properly. Check that the indicators work properly. When the OFF indicator turns off and the ON indicator illuminates, the front passengers frontal airbag may deploy during a collision. Remove luggage and electronic devices from the front passengers seat. NOTE This device complies with Part 18 of the FCC Rules. This device may cause interference. If this device causes interference, consult the nearest Toyota dealer. Also, for maintenance of the system, consult the nearest Toyota dealer.

Conditions in which front passengers SRS frontal airbag is not acti- vated The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will not be activated when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passengers seat: The seat is empty. The seat is equipped with an appropriate child restraint system and an

infant is restrained in it. The occupant changed their posture after the occupant load is judged. The front passengers occupant classification system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

When the front passengers seat is occupied by an infant in an appropriate child restraint system, observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification system, acti- vating the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even though that seat is occu- pied by the infant in the child restraint system. Do not place any article (including electronic devices) on the seat other than

the infant in the child restraint system. Do not place more than one infant in the child restraint system.

100

1-7. Safety information

If the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat) Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position (vehicles without a smart key system), or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off (vehicles with a smart key system) if the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illumi- nates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat). Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By referring to the child restraint manufac- turers recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedures in Child restraint systems (P. 137), correctly install the child restraint system. Turn the engine switch to the ON position (vehicles with- out a smart key system), or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNI- TION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) and make sure that the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. If still the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off, take the following actions. Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the child restraint

system and the child occupant. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of front passen-

gers seat are locked into place securely by moving the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off after taking relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection. NOTE When a child who has outgrown a child restraint system or a small adult is seated in the front passengers seat, the Toyota advanced frontal airbag sys- tem may or may not activate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag depending on the occupants seating posture. The child should always wear the seat belt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated. If the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is acti- vated (the ON indicator remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off), take the following actions.

101

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the occupant. If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indicator turns off despite the fact that the actions noted above have been taken, seat the child/small adult in the rear seat and immediately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection. Even if the system has passed the dealer inspection, it is recommended that on subsequent trips the child/small adult always take the rear seat. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seat belt irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

Conditions in which front passengers SRS frontal airbag is activated The front passengers SRS frontal airbag will be activated for deployment upon impact when any of the following conditions are met regarding the front passengers seat. When the seat is occupied by an adult. When a certain item(s) (e.g. jug of water) is placed on the seat.

102

1-7. Safety information

If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult This can be caused by the adult incorrectly sitting in the front passengers seat. Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position (vehicles without a smart key system), or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off (vehicles with a smart key system). Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, correctly fasten the seat belt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. Turn the engine switch to the ON position (vehicles without a smart key system), or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system). If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, take the following actions. Vehicles without a smart key system:

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off.

Make sure that the front passenger does not use a blanket, seat cushion, seat cover, seat heater or massager, etc.

If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passengers seat, or should sit in a rear seat.

Next, turn the engine switch to the ON position and wait 6 seconds to allow the system to complete self-checking. Following the system check, both indicators turn off for 2 seconds. Now, the ON indicator should illu- minate while the OFF indicator remains off.

If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection.

103

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Operation Driver's side

Passengers side

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the drivers vision is not obstructed.

SRS AIRBAGs deploy as soon as a collision occurs. After deployment, SRS AIRBAGs start to deflate immediately so that the driver's vision is not obstructed.

104

1-7. Safety information

The SRS airbag can function only when the engine switch is in the ON position (vehicles without a smart key system) or when the ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system). The Toyota advanced frontal airbag system is designed to determine the activation or deactivation condition of the front passengers SRS frontal air- bag depending on the characteristic of the item(s) or person on the front passengers seat monitored by the front passengers occupant classification system sensor. For this reason, only the drivers SRS frontal airbag may deploy in the event of a collision, but this does not mean failure of the sys- tem. If the front sub sensors and the impact sensors in the airbag control module detect a predetermined amount of force during a frontal collision, the control module sends signals to the airbag module(s) (only drivers module or both drivers and front passengers modules) instructing the module(s) to inflate the SRS frontal airbag(s). The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags use dual stage infla- tors. The two inflators of each airbag are triggered either sequentially or simultaneously, depending on the severity of impact, in the case of the drivers SRS frontal airbag and depending on the severity of impact and the characteristic of the item(s) or person on the seat in the case of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. After deployment, the SRS airbag immediately starts to deflate so that the drivers vision is not obstructed. The time required from detecting impact to the deflation of the SRS airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. Both when only the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys and the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags deploy, the drivers and front passen- gers seat belt pretensioners operate at the same time. Although it is highly unlikely that the SRS airbag would activate in a non- accident situation, should it occur, the SRS airbag will deflate quickly, not obscuring vision and will not interfere with the driver's ability to maintain con- trol of the vehicle. When the SRS airbag deploys, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle.

105

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

The drivers SRS frontal airbag and front passengers SRS frontal airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe frontal collision. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser fron- tal impacts because the necessary protection can be achieved by the seat belt alone. Also, they are not designed to deploy in most side or rear impacts or in most roll-over accidents because deployment of only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags would not help the occupant in those situations. The drivers and front pas- sengers SRS frontal airbags are designed to function on a one-time-only basis. SRS airbag deployment depends on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

Example of accident in which the drivers/drivers and front passen- gers SRS frontal airbag(s) will most likely deploy

A head-on collision against a thick concrete wall at a vehicle speeds of 12 to 19 mph (20 to 30 km/h) or higher activates only the drivers SRS frontal air- bag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags. The airbag(s) will also be activated when the vehicle is exposed to a frontal impact similar in fashion and magnitude to the collision described above.

106

1-7. Safety information

Examples of the types of accidents in which it is possible that the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will deploy

Examples of the types of accidents in which deployment of the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) is unlikely to occur There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require deployment of drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s). In the event of accidents like those illustrated, the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

Only the drivers SRS frontal airbag or both drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags may be activated when the vehicle sustains a hard impact in the undercarriage area from the road surface (such as when the vehicle plunges into a deep ditch, is severely impacted or knocked hard against an obstacle on the road such as a curb).

The vehicle strikes an object, such as a telephone pole or sign pole.

107

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

The vehicle slides under the load bed of a truck.

The vehicle sustains an oblique offset frontal impact.

The vehicle sustains an offset frontal colli- sion.

The vehicle strikes an object that can move or deform, such as a parked vehi- cle.

108

1-7. Safety information

Examples of the types of accidents in which the drivers/drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbag(s) will basically not deploy

The drivers and front passengers SRS frontal airbags are designed not to deploy in most cases if the vehicle is struck from the side or from behind, or if it rolls onto its side or roof, or if it is involved in a low- speed frontal collision.

First impact Second impact

In an accident where the vehicle is impacted more than once, the drivers and/or front passengers SRS frontal air- bag(s) will deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double colli- sion, first with another vehicle, then against a concrete wall in immediate suc- cession, once either or both of the drivers and front passengers SRS frontal air- bags is/are activated on the first impact, it/they will not be activated on the second impact.

109

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

If the SRS airbags deploy Do not touch the SRS airbag system components around the steering wheel and dashboard with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

Child restraint precautions NEVER INSTALL A REARWARD FACING CHILD SEAT IN THE FRONT PASSENGERS SEAT EVEN IF THE FRONT PASSENGERS SRS FRON- TAL AIRBAG IS DEACTIVATED. Be sure to install it in the REAR seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recommended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the REAR seat, and that even chil- dren who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the REAR seat. This is because children sitting in the front passengers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passengers SRS frontal airbag deploy. REAR seats are the safest place for children.

110

1-7. Safety information

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag

The SRS side airbag is stored in the door side of each front seat seatback, which bears an SRS AIRBAG label.

In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS side airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occupant and the door panel and supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on the occupants chest and waist. The SRS side airbag operates only for front seat occupants.

The SRS curtain shield airbag on each side of the cabin is stored in the roof side (between the front pillar and a point over the rear seat). An SRS AIRBAG mark is located at the top of each front and rear pillar. In a moderate to severe side impact collision, the SRS curtain shield airbag on the impacted side of the vehicle deploys between the occu- pant and the side window and supplements the seat belt by reducing the impact on the occupants head.

111

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Operation

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag can function only when the engine switch is in the ON position (vehicles without a smart key sys- tem) or when the ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system). The drivers and front passengers SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags deploy independently of each other since each has its own impact sensor. Therefore, they may not both deploy in the same accident. Also, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploys independently of the drivers and front passengers SRS front airbags in the steering wheel and instrument panel. A rollover sensor is also located inside the airbag control module. An impact sensor, which senses impact force, is located in each of the left and right center pillars, doors and rear wheel houses. Another impact sen- sor, which also senses impact force, is located under the center of the rear seats. If the impact sensor that is located under the center of the rear seats and one of the center pillar impact sensors or door impact sensors together sense an impact force above a predetermined level in a side collision, the control module causes both the SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag on the impacted side to inflate regardless of whether the rear wheel house impact sensor on the same side senses an impact. If the impact sensor that is located under the center of the rear seats and one of the rear wheel house impact sensors together sense an impact force above a predetermined level, the control module causes only the SRS cur- tain shield airbag on the impacted side to inflate. If the rollover sensor detects rollover of the vehicle, the control module inflates the SRS curtain shield airbags. At this time, the driver's and front passengers seat belt pretensioners also operate at the same time.

112

1-7. Safety information

After the deployment, the SRS side airbag immediately starts to deflate. The time required from detection of an impact to deflation of an SRS side airbag after deployment is shorter than the blink of an eye. The SRS curtain shield airbag remains inflated for a while following deploy- ment then slowly deflates. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy even when no one occupies the seat on the side on which an impact is applied. When the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy, a sudden, fairly loud inflation noise will be heard and some smoke will be released. These occurrences are a normal result of the deployment. This smoke does not indicate a fire in the vehicle. The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed to deploy in the event of an accident involving a moderate to severe side impact colli- sion. They are not designed to deploy in most lesser side impact. Also, they are not designed to deploy in most frontal or most rear impacts because SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment would not help the occupant in those situations. The SRS curtain shield airbags are also designed to deploy when the vehi- cle is in an extremely inclined state such as during a rollover. They are not designed to deploy in lesser inclined state. Each SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed to func- tion on a one-time-only basis. SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment depend on the level of force experienced in the passenger compartment during a side impact collision. That level differs from one type of collision to another, and it may have no bearing on the visible damage done to the vehicle itself.

113

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Example of the type of accident in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag will most likely deploy

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS curtain shield air- bag will most likely deploy

A severe side impact near the front seat activates the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or the roof.

The side of the vehicle raises above a certain threshold or the vehicle skids and its tires hit a curbstone laterally.

114

1-7. Safety information

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are unlikely to deploy There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deployment. In the event of acci- dents like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield air- bag may not deploy depending on the level of accident forces involved.

The vehicle is involved in an oblique side- on impact.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact in an area outside the vicinity of the passenger compartment.

115

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag is unlikely to deploy There are many types of collisions which might not necessarily require SRS side airbag deployment. In the event of an accident like those illustrated, the SRS side airbag may not deploy depending on the level of accident force involved.

The vehicle strikes a telephone pole or similar object.

The vehicle is involved in a side-on impact from a motorcycle.

The vehicle rolls onto its side or roof.

116

1-7. Safety information

Examples of the types of accidents in which the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag will basically not deploy

The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are not designed to deploy in most cases if the vehicle is involved in a frontal collision, is struck from behind or pitches end over end. Examples of such accidents are illus- trated.

The vehicle is involved in frontal collision with another vehicle (moving or station- ary).

The vehicle is struck from behind.

The vehicle pitches end over end.

117

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

In an accident where the vehicle is struck from the side more than once, the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag deploy only once on the first impact. Example: In the case of a double side impact collision, first with one vehicle and immediately followed by another from the same direction, once the SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are activated on the first impact, they will not be activated on the second.

SRS curtain shield airbag SRS side airbag

Second impact First impact

118

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

If the SRS airbags deploy Do not touch the SRS side airbag system components around the front seat seatback with bare hands right after deployment. Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment. After deployment, do not touch any part of the SRS curtain shield airbag sys- tem (from the front pillar to the part of the roof side over the rear seat). Doing so can cause burns because the components can be very hot as a result of deployment.

SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag precautions The SRS side airbag and SRS curtain shield airbag are designed only to be a supplement to the primary protection provided by the seat belt. They do not do away with the need to fasten seat belts. It is also important to wear your seat belt to help avoid injuries that can result when an occupant is not seated in a proper upright position.

119

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

When to contact your Toyota dealer In the following cases, the vehicle will require inspection and/or repair. Con- tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible. Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

The front of the vehicle is damaged or deformed, or was involved in an acci- dent that was not severe enough to cause the SRS airbags to inflate.

A portion of a door is damaged or deformed, or the vehicle was involved in an accident that was not severe enough to cause the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags to inflate.

The pad section of the steering wheel or dashboard is scratched, cracked, or otherwise damaged.

The surface of the seats with the side airbag is scratched, cracked, or other- wise damaged.

120

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

SRS airbag precautions Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags. Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury. The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly. The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

The portion of the front pillars, rear pil- lars or roof side rail garnishes (padding) containing the curtain shield airbags inside is scratched, cracked or other- wise damaged.

121

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

SRS airbag precautions The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag. The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) advises: Since the risk zone for the drivers airbag is the first 2 - 3 in. (50 - 75 mm) of inflation, placing yourself 10 in. (250 mm) from your driver airbag pro- vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 10 in. (250 mm) away now, you can change your driving position in several ways: Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably. Slightly recline the back of the seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 10 in. (250 mm) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air- bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended by NHTSA above, while still maintaining control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instrument panel controls.

The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air- bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits upright.

Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys- tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 137)

122

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

SRS airbag precautions

Do not sit on the edge of the seat or lean against the dashboard.

Do not allow a child to stand in front of the SRS front passenger airbag unit or sit on the knees of a front passenger.

Do not allow the front seat occupants to hold items on their knees.

Do not lean against the door, the roof side rail or the front, side and rear pil- lars.

123

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

SRS airbag precautions

Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags. Such accessories may prevent the side airbags from activating correctly, disable the system or cause the side airbags to inflate accidentally, resulting in death or serious injury.

Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air- bag components (P. 94). Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

Do not allow anyone to kneel on the passenger seat toward the door or put their head or hands outside the vehicle.

Do not attach anything to or lean any- thing against areas such as the dash- board or steering wheel pad. These items can become projectiles when SRS driver and front passenger airbags deploy.

Do not attach anything to areas such as a door, windshield glass, side door glass, rear quarter glass, front and rear pillar or roof side rail.

124

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

SRS airbag precautions Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-

bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot. If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag has deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel pad and front and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked, have them replaced by your Toyota dealer.

Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications without consulting your Toyota dealer. The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing death or serious injury. Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags. Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear pillars or roof side rails.

Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the occupant compartment.

Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows, winches.

Modifications to the vehicle's suspension system. Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios and CD

players. Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability.

125

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

SRS airbag system monitors

A diagnostic system continually monitors the readiness of the SRS airbag system (including front seat belt pretensioners) while the vehicle is being driven. The SRS warning light will show normal system operation by illu- minating for approximately 6 seconds when the engine switch is turned to the ON position (vehicles without a smart key system), or the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNI- TION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

The following components are monitored by the indicator:

Front sub sensor (right-hand side)

Front sub sensor (left-hand side)

Airbag control module (including impact sensors and rollover sen- sors)

Frontal airbag module (drivers side)

Frontal airbag module (front passengers side)

Side airbag sensor (center pillar right-hand side)

Side airbag sensor (center pillar left-hand side)

Door impact sensor (right-hand side)

Door impact sensor (left-hand side)

Side airbag module (drivers side)

Vehicles with a monochrome multi- information display

Vehicles with a color multi-information display

126

1-7. Safety information

Side airbag module (front passengers side)

Curtain shield airbag sensor (rear wheel house right-hand side)

Curtain shield airbag sensor (rear wheel house left-hand side)

Curtain shield airbag module (right-hand side)

Curtain shield airbag module (left-hand side)

Satellite safing sensor (under the center of the rear seats)

Seat belt pretensioner (drivers side)

Seat belt pretensioner (front passengers side)

Seat belt buckle switch (front passengers side)

Front passengers occupant classification system sensor

Front passengers occupant detection control module

Front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicator

All related wiring

127

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

SRS warning light If the warning light exhibits any of the following conditions, there may be a malfunction in the seat belt pretensioners, SRS airbag system and/or front passenger occupant classification system. Immediately take your vehicle to your nearest Toyota dealer to have the system checked. Unless checked and properly repaired, the seat belt pretensioners, SRS airbag and/or front passenger occupant classification system will not operate properly in the event of a collision, which may increase the risk of death or serious injury. Flashing or flickering of the warning light No illumination of the warning light when the engine switch is first turned to

the ON position (vehicles without a smart key system), or the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

Continuous illumination of the warning light Illumination of the warning light while driving

128

1-7. Safety information

Front passenger occupant classification system

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classifica- tion system. Using the sensors installed under the seat cover, the system detects the conditions of the front passenger seat and acti- vates or deactivates the frontal airbag for front passenger seat. The occupant classification system may not inflate the front passengers SRS frontal airbag even when the drivers SRS frontal airbag deploys. This is not a malfunction. If the seat belt buckle switch and/ or front passengers occupant classification system have failed, the SRS warning light will illuminate. Have the system inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately if the SRS warning light illuminates. If your vehicle has sustained impact, this may affect the proper func- tion of the Toyota advanced frontal airbag system. Immediately con- tact your Toyota dealer and have your vehicle inspected. Do not use the front passenger seat while driving to your Toyota dealer.

SRS warning light Front passengers seat belt reminder light AIR BAG OFF indicator light AIR BAG ON indicator light

129

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system*1

Adult*2

Child restraint system with infant*6, *7, *8

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG ON

SRS warning light Off Front passengers seat belt reminder light Flashing*3

Devices

Front passenger airbag

On Front side airbag*4

Front curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner*4

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF*9

SRS warning light Off

Front passengers seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner*4

The front passengers frontal airbag ON and OFF indicators show you the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag. When the engine switch is turned to ON position (vehicles without a smart key system), or the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNI- TION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system), both the ON and OFF indicators illuminate while the system is checked, after which both indicators turn off. After that, one of the indicators illuminates depending on the status of the front passengers SRS frontal airbag determined by the Toyota advanced frontal airbag monitoring system.

130

1-7. Safety information

Child*5, *7

Unoccupied

There is a malfunction in the system

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF or AIR BAG ON*5

SRS warning light Off

Front passengers seat belt reminder light Off or flashing*3, *5

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off or on*5

Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner*4

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light Off

Front passengers seat belt reminder light

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner*4

Indicator/ warning light

AIR BAG ON and AIR BAG OFF indicator lights

AIR BAG OFF

SRS warning light On Front passengers seat belt reminder light Off

Devices

Front passenger airbag Off Front side airbag*4

OnFront curtain shield airbag*4

Front passengers seat belt pretensioner*4

131

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

*1: The occupant classification system does not operate during self- checking.

*2: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult depending on his/her physique and posture.

*3: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt. *4: The front passengers SRS side airbag, SRS curtain shield airbag

and seat belt pretensioner are not controlled by the occupant classification system.

*5: For some children, child in seat, child in booster seat or child in convertible seat, the system may not recognize him/her as a child. Factors which may affect this can be the physique or pos- ture. Children who have outgrown a child restraint system should always wear the seat belt when sitting in the seat irrespective of whether the airbag is deactivated or activated.

*6: When a child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat, do not place any article on the seat other than the child occupant and a child restraint system. Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant classi- fication system from functioning correctly or cause the system to fail.

*7: Do not place more than one child on the front passenger seat. Failure to do so may prevent the front passenger occupant classi- fication system from functioning correctly.

*8: Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front pas- senger seat. See the caution that follows regarding installation of a child restraint system. (P. 141)

*9: In case the indicator is not illuminated, consult this manual on how to installing the child restraint system properly. (P. 141)

132

1-7. Safety information

If the passengers frontal airbag OFF indicator illuminates and the ON indicator turns off even when the front passengers seat is occupied by an adult

This can be caused by an adult incorrectly sitting in the front passen- gers seat. Perform the following.

Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is turned to the LOCK position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off. Ask the front passenger to set the seatback to the upright position, sit up straight in the center of the seat cushion, cor- rectly wear the seat belt, position his/her legs out forward, and adjust the seat to the rearmost position. Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is turned to the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode. If the OFF indicator remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, perform the following. Vehicles without a smart key system:

The engine switch is turned to the LOCK position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off.

Make sure that the front passenger is not using a blanket, seat cushion, seat cover or seat heater, etc.

If wearing excessive layers of clothing, the front passenger should remove any unnecessary items before sitting in the front passenger seat, or should sit in a rear seat.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

133

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

The engine switch is turned to the ON position (vehicles without a smart key system), or the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key sys- tem). After the self-check is performed, the ON indicator should illuminate while the OFF indicator remains off. If the OFF indicator still remains illuminated while the ON indicator remains off, ask the occupant to move to the rear seat and immediately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection.

STEP 5

134

1-7. Safety information

If the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator illuminates and the OFF indicator turns off even when an infant or a small child is in a child restraint system (including booster seat)

This can be caused by the child restraint system being installed incor- rectly. Perform the following.

Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is turned to the LOCK position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off. Remove the child restraint system from the seat. By referring to the child restraint manufacturers recommendations as well as the child restraint system installation procedure in child restraint system, correctly reinstall the child restraint system. Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is turned to the ON position and make sure that the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode and make sure that the front passengers frontal airbag ON indicator turns off and the OFF indicator illuminates. If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indi- cator turns off, perform the following. Ensure that no article is placed on the seat other than the

child restraint system and the child occupant. Ensure that the backward-forward position and seatback of

front passenger seat are locked into place securely by mov- ing the seat back and forth.

If the ON indicator still remains illuminated while the OFF indi- cator turns off after taking the relevant corrective actions described above, relocate the child restraint system to the rear seat and immediately contact your Toyota dealer for an inspection.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

135

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Observe the following precautions regarding front passenger occupant clas- sification system. Failure to do so may cause the occupant classification system to not function correctly, resulting in death or serious injury. Wear the seat belt properly. Do not apply excessive force to the seat. Do not put sharp object(s) on the seat or pierce the seat upholstery. Do not put objects under the front passenger seat. Do not use a seat accessory, such as a cushion or seat cover, that covers

the seat cushion surface. Do not spill liquid on the front passenger seat. If liquid is spilled, wipe it off

immediately and dry the seat. If the airbag warning light illuminates, dry the seat until the warning light turns off. If the airbag warning light stays on even when the seat has dried, do not allow anyone to sit on the front pas- senger seat and have the system checked by your Toyota dealer. If the air- bag warning light does not illuminate, check that the airbag ON/OFF indicator light works properly. If the indicator light does not work properly, do not allow anyone to sit in the front passengers seat and have the sys- tem inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Do not remove or disassemble the front passenger seat. Also, do not replace or modify the seat upholstery or foam inside the seat.

Do not install any accessory (such as an audio amplifier) other than a gen- uine Toyota accessory under the front passengers seat.

Do not place a magnetized items near the seat belt buckle.

136

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

Front passenger occupant classification system precautions Never install a rearward facing child seat in the front passengers seat

even if the front passengers SRS frontal airbag is deactivated. Be sure to install it in the rear seat in a correct manner. Also, it is strongly recom- mended that any forward facing child seat or booster seat be installed in the rear seat, and that even children who have outgrown a child restraint system be also seated in the rear seat. This is because children sitting in the front passengers seat may be killed or severely injured should the front passengers SRS frontal airbag deploy. Toyota believes that the rear seats are the safest place for children

If luggage or electronic devices are placed on the front passenger seat, the OFF indicator may turn off and the ON indicator may illuminate. If this occurs, the front passengers airbag may deploy during a collision. If this is not desirable, remove the luggage or electronic devices from the front pas- senger seat.

Modifications for persons with disabilities that may affect the front passen- ger occupant classification system. (U.S. only) Removing, replacing or modifying any parts of the front seats, seat belts, front bumper, front side frame, instrument panel, combination meter, steering wheel, steering col- umn, tires, suspension or floor panel can affect the operation of the Toyota front passenger occupant classification system.

137

1

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

Choose a child restraint system that suits your vehicle and is appropriate to the age and size of the child.

For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the child restraint system. General installation instructions are provided in this manual. (P. 141)

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 3 types according to the age and size of the child.

Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat

A child restraint system for a small child or baby must itself be prop- erly restrained on the seat with the LATCH anchors or the lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.

The laws of all 50 states of the U.S.A. and Canada now require the use of child restraint systems.

138

1-7. Safety information

Forward facing Convertible seat

Booster seat

Selecting an appropriate child restraint system Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicles seat belt. If a child is too large for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear

seat and use the vehicle's seat belt. (P. 60)

139

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

Child restraint precautions For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle's interior.

Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con- forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci- dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.

Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front passenger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-facing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat.

A forward-facing child restraint system may be installed on the front pas- senger seat only when it is unavoidable. A child restraint system that requires a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat since there is no top tether strap anchor for the front passenger seat. Adjust the seatback as upright as possible and always move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illumi- nated, because the front passenger airbag could inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be killed or seriously injured.

140

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

Child restraint precautions Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat, front and rear pillars or roof side rails from which the SRS side airbags or SRS curtain shield airbags deploy even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if the SRS side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could cause death or serious injury to the child.

Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or an accident.

When children are in the vehicle Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes twisted around a childs neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries that could result in death. If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used to cut the belt.

When the child restraint system is not in use Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is

not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart- ment.

If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the vehicle or store it securely in the trunk. This will prevent it from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

141

1

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer's instructions. Firmly secure child restraints to the rear seats using the LATCH anchors or a seat belt. Attach the top tether strap when installing a child restraint.

The lap/shoulder belt can be used if your child restraint system is not compatible with the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chil- dren) system.

Child restraint LATCH anchors

LATCH anchors are provided for both rear seats. (Buttons displaying the location of the anchors are attached to the seats.)

Seat belts equipped with a child restraint locking mecha- nism (ALR/ELR belts except drivers seat belt) (P. 60)

Anchor bracket (for top tether strap)

Anchor brackets are provided for both rear seats.

142

1-7. Safety information

Installation with LATCH system

Type A

Pull the cover. Latch the hooks of the lower straps onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.

For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

143

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Type B

Pull the cover. Latch the buckles onto the LATCH anchors. If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchors.

For owners in Canada: The symbol on a child restraint system indicates the presence of a lower connector system.

Canada only

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

144

1-7. Safety information

Installing child restraints using a seat belt (child restraint lock function belt)

Rear facing Infant seat/convertible seat Place the child restraint system on the rear seat facing the rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

145

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

While pushing the child restraint system down into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

Forward facing Convertible seat Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Fully extend the shoulder belt and allow it to retract to put it in lock mode. In lock mode, the belt cannot be extended.

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

146

1-7. Safety information

While pushing the child restraint system into the rear seat, allow the shoulder belt to retract until the child restraint system is securely in place.

After the shoulder belt has retracted to a point where there is no slack in the belt, pull the belt to check that it cannot be extended.

If the child restraint has a top tether strap, the top tether strap should be latched onto the top tether strap anchor. (P. 147)

Booster seat Place the child restraint system on the seat facing the front of the vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint system. Fit the seat belt to the child restraint system and insert the plate into the buckle. Make sure that the belt is not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is correctly positioned over the child's shoulder and that the lap belt is as low as possible. (P. 60)

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

147

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

Removing a child restraint installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button and fully retract the seat belt.

Child restraint systems with a top tether strap

Secure the child restraint using a seat belt or the LATCH anchors.

Remove the anchor bracket cover.

Store the removed cover in a safe place.

STEP 1

STEP 2

148

1-7. Safety information

Latch the hook onto the anchor bracket and tighten the top tether strap.

Make sure the top tether strap is securely latched.

STEP 3

When installing a child restraint system with LATCH anchors and a top tether strap Depending on the child restraint system's size and shape, if the child restraint system is installed to the LATCH anchors first, it may not be possi- ble to attach the top tether strap to the anchor bracket. In that case, first temporarily attach the top tether strap to the anchor bracket, install the child restraint system using the lower anchors and then tighten the top tether strap.

Laws and regulations pertaining to anchorages The LATCH system conforms to FMVSS225 or CMVSS210.2. Child restraint systems conforming to FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specifica- tions can be used. This vehicle is designed to conform to the SAE J1819.

149

1-7. Safety information

1

Before driving

WARNING

When installing a booster seat To prevent the belt from going into ALR lock mode, do not fully extend the shoulder belt. ALR mode causes the belt to tighten only. This could cause injury or discomfort to the child. (P. 62)

When installing a child restraint system Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual and fix the child restraint system securely in place. If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other passengers may be injured or even killed in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

If the drivers seat interferes with the child restraint system and prevents it from being attached correctly, attach the child restraint system to the right- hand rear seat.

Adjust the front passenger seat so that it does not interfere with the child restraint system.

Only put a forward facing child restraint system on the front seat when unavoid- able. When installing a forward facing child restraint system on the front pas- senger seat, move the seat as far back as possible even if the AIR BAG OFF indicator light is illuminated. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury if the airbags deploy (inflate).

150

1-7. Safety information

WARNING

When installing a child restraint system When a booster seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the child's shoulder. The belt should be kept away from the child's neck, but not so that it could fall off the child's shoulder. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Ensure that the belt and plate are securely locked and the seat belt is not twisted.

Shake the child restraint system left and right, and forward and backward to ensure that it has been securely installed.

After securing a child restraint system, never adjust the seat. Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system

manufacturer. To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the LATCH anchors, be sure that there are no foreign objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the child restraint. Make sure the child restraint system is securely attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passengers in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerve or an accident.

When driving 2

151

2-1. Driving procedures Driving the vehicle............ 152 Engine (ignition) switch

(vehicles with a smart key system).................... 166

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system).......... 175

Automatic transmission.... 178 Manual Transmission....... 185 Turn signal lever .............. 188 Parking brake................... 189 Horn ................................. 190

2-2. Instrument cluster Gauges and meters ......... 191 Indicators and warning

lights .............................. 194 Multi-information display

(monochrome display) ... 200 Multi-information display

(color display) ................ 207

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch............... 222 Fog light switch ................ 228 Windshield wipers and

washer ........................... 229

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control................... 232 Rear view monitor

system ........................... 237 Driving assist systems ..... 245 Hill-start assist control ...... 252

2-5. Driving information Cargo and luggage .......... 256 Vehicle load limits ............ 260 Winter driving tips ............ 261 Trailer towing ................... 265 Dinghy towing .................. 266

152

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv- ing:

Starting the engine P. 166, 175

Driving

Vehicles with an automatic transmission With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to D. (P. 178) Release the parking brake. (P. 189) Gradually release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, shift the shift lever to 1. (P. 185) Release the parking brake. (P. 189) Gradually release the clutch pedal. At the same time, gently depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

Stopping

Vehicles with an automatic transmission With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. If necessary, set the parking brake. If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to P or N. (P. 178)

Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal. If necessary, set the parking brake. If the vehicle is to be stopped for an extended period of time, shift the shift lever to N. (P. 185)

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

153

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Parking the vehicle

Vehicles with an automatic transmission With the shift lever in D, depress the brake pedal. Shift the shift lever to P. (P. 178) Set the parking brake. (P. 189) Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position to stop the engine. Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the ENGINE START STOP switch to stop the engine. Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. If parking on a hill, block the wheels as needed.

Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, depress the brake pedal. Shift the shift lever to N. (P. 185) Set the parking brake. (P. 189) Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position to stop the engine. Vehicles with a smart key system: Press the ENGINE START STOP switch to stop the engine. Lock the door, making sure that you have the key on your person. If parking on a hill, shift the shift lever to 1 or R and block the wheels as needed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

154

2-1. Driving procedures

Starting off on a steep uphill

Vehicles with an automatic transmission Make sure that the parking brake is set and shift the shift lever to D. Gently depress the accelerator pedal. Release the parking brake.

Vehicles with a manual transmission With the parking brake firmly set and the clutch pedal fully depressed, shift the shift lever to 1. Lightly depress the accelerator pedal at the same time as gradually releasing the clutch pedal. Release the parking brake.

When starting off on an uphill When enabled, the hill-start assist control can operate. (P. 252)

Driving in the rain Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the

windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery. Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be

especially slippery. Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,

because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

155

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Engine speed while driving (vehicles with an automatic transmission) In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving. This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration. The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill When the accelerator pedal is released When driving on curves When the brake pedal is firmly depressed

New vehicle break-in driving (the first 1000 miles [1600 km]) The performance and long life of your vehicle are dependent on how you handle and care for your vehicle while it is new. Follow these instructions during the first 1000 miles (1600 km): Do not race the engine. And do not allow the engine speed to exceed

4000 rpm except in an emergency. Do not drive at one constant engine or vehicle speed for a long time,

either fast or slow. Avoid starting suddenly and rapid acceleration, except in an emergency. Avoid hard braking, except in an emergency.

The same break-in procedures should be applied to an overhauled engine, newly mounted engine or when brake pads or brake linings are replaced with new ones.

High friction brake pads (if equipped) The brake pads and discs are designed for use under high load conditions. Therefore, brake noise may be generated depending on the vehicle speed, braking force and vehicle environment (temperature, humidity, etc.).

Drum-in-disc type parking brake system Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when- ever the parking brake shoes and/or drum are replaced. Have your Toyota dealer perform the bedding down.

156

2-1. Driving procedures

After the engine starts In order to secure a rich exhaust sound when starting the vehicle and envi- ronmental performance, air intake and exhaust sounds become loud and vibrations may increase for a little while after the engine starts. This is not a malfunction.

Operating your vehicle in a foreign country Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability of the correct fuel. (P. 461)

REV indicator

WARNING

When starting the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle from creeping. Firmly depress the brake pedal because engine speed may increase

immediately after starting the engine, when the air conditioning system is operating, when turning the steering wheel, etc., thereby causing creeping to become stronger. Apply the parking brake as necessary.

When the set engine speed is reached the REV indicator comes on and a buzzer sounds to inform the driver. (P. 204, 217) (When the engine speed enters the red zone, the REV indicator flashes regard- less of settings.)

157

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When driving the vehicle Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-

erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal. Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake

pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident that could result in death or serious injury.

When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi- culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the vehicle only slightly. This allows you to depress the brake and acceler- ator pedals properly.

Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result- ing in an accident.

Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials. The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. These hot parts may cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not let the vehicle roll backward while the shift lever is in a driving position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in R. Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and check that the trunk is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi- ately.

On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not shift the shift lever to R while the vehicle is moving forward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

Do not shift the shift lever to a driving position while the vehicle is moving backward. Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle control.

158

2-1. Driving procedures

WARNING

On vehicles with a manual transmission, do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may propel the vehicle forward, possibly causing an accident.

Moving the shift lever to N while the vehicle is moving will disengage the engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when N is selected.

During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 455

Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving down a steep hill. Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose effectiveness. (P. 179, 185)

Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or outside rear view mirrors while driving. Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents, resulting in death or serious injury.

Always check that all passengers' arms, heads or other parts of their body are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

Do not drive in excess of the speed limit. Even if the legal speed limit per- mits it, do not drive over 85 mph (140 km/h) unless your vehicle has high- speed capability tires. Driving over 85 mph (140 km/h) may result in tire failure, loss of control and possible injury. Be sure to consult a tire dealer to determine whether the tires on your vehicle are high-speed capability tires or not before driving at such speeds.

159

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When driving on slippery road surfaces Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident. Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shifting, or changes in engine

speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident. After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make

sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in an accident.

When shifting the shift lever On vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift

lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. Shifting the shift lever to a gear other than P or N may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

Do not place items in the shift lever's surrounding area. It may cause incor- rect operation.

If the shift boot is pulled out during cleaning, return it to its previous posi- tion. If the shift boot is left pulled out, the shift lever may become difficult to operate.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear limit indica- tors) Have your Toyota dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as pos- sible. Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed. It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads and/or those of the brake discs are exceeded.

160

2-1. Driving procedures

WARNING

When the vehicle is stopped Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than P (vehicles with an automatic trans- mission only) or N, the vehicle may accelerate suddenly and unexpectedly, causing an accident.

Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time. If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, in order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the parking brake as necessary.

If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

Avoid revving or racing the engine. Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible material is nearby.

161

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When the vehicle is parked Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in

the vehicle when it is in the sun. Doing so may result in the following: Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a

fire. The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and

plastic material of glasses to deform or crack. Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the

interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi- cle's electrical components.

Do not leave cigarette lighters in the vehicle. If a cigarette lighter is in a place such as the glove box or on the floor, it may be lit accidentally when luggage is loaded or the seat is adjusted, causing a fire.

Do not attach suction cups to the windshield or windows. Do not place containers such as air fresheners on the instrument panel or dashboard. Suction cups or containers may act as lenses, causing a fire in the vehicle.

Do not leave a door or window open if the curved glass is coated with a metallized film such as a silver-colored one. Reflected sunlight may cause the glass to act as a lens, causing a fire.

Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission only), stop the engine and lock the vehicle. Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately after turning the engine off. Doing so may cause burns.

Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

162

2-1. Driving procedures

WARNING

Exhaust gases Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health hazard. If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

The exhaust system should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by your Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in death or a serious health hazard.

When taking a nap in the vehicle Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift lever or depress the accelerator pedal, this could cause an accident or fire due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle, leading to death or a serious health hazard.

163

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When braking When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and this may cause one side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also, the parking brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

If the brake booster device does not operate, do not follow other vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking. In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls. Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted brakes.

The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems; if one of the systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will increase. Have your brakes fixed immediately.

164

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

Pre-driving check Trapping small animals in the cooling fan and belts of the engine may result in a malfunction. Check that no small animal enters the engine compartment and under the vehicle before starting the engine.

When driving the vehicle Vehicles with an automatic transmission Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain driving torque. Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress the accelerator and brake

pedals at the same time to hold the vehicle on a hill. Vehicles with a manual transmission Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain driving torque. Do not shift gears unless the clutch pedal is fully depressed. After shifting,

do not release the clutch pedal abruptly. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

Observe the following to prevent the clutch from being damaged. Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.

Doing so may cause clutch trouble. Do not use any gear other than the 1st gear when starting off and mov-

ing forward. Doing so may damage the clutch.

Do not use the clutch to hold the vehicle when stopping on an uphill grade. Doing so may damage the clutch.

Do not shift the shift lever to R when the vehicle is still moving. Doing so may damage the clutch, transmission and gears.

Do not release the clutch pedal too quickly. Doing so may damage the transmission.

When parking the vehicle (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Always shift the shift lever to P. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci- dentally depressed.

165

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

NOTICE

Avoiding damage to vehicle parts Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for

an extended period of time. Doing so may damage the power steering motor.

When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

On vehicles with an automatic transmission, do not race the engine for more than 5 seconds in any position except the N or P position when the brake is applied or when chocks are used in the wheels. This may cause the transmission fluid to overheat.

If you get a flat tire while driving A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering wheel firmly and gradually depress the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle. It may be difficult to control your vehicle. The vehicle will make abnormal sounds or vibrations. The vehicle will lean abnormally. Information on what to do in case of a flat tire (P. 425)

When encountering flooded roads Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause the following serious damage to the vehicle: Engine stalling Short in electrical components Engine damage caused by water immersion In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be sure to have your Toyota dealer check the following: Brake function Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-

mission, differential, etc. Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

166

2-1. Driving procedures

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles with a smart key system)

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic key on your person starts the engine or changes ENGINE START STOP switch modes.

Starting the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in P. If the shift lever is not set in P, the engine may not be started. (P. 178)

Firmly depress the brake pedal. The smart key system indicator light (green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be started.

Press the ENGINE START STOP switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the ENGINE START STOP switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 10 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the brake pedal until the engine is com- pletely started.

The engine can be started from any ENGINE START STOP switch mode.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

167

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Vehicles with a manual transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in N. Firmly depress the clutch pedal. The smart key system indicator light (green) will turn on. If the indicator light does not turn on, the engine cannot be started.

Press the ENGINE START STOP switch shortly and firmly.

When operating the ENGINE START STOP switch, one short, firm press is enough. It is not necessary to press and hold the switch.

The engine will crank until it starts or for up to 10 seconds, whichever is less.

Continue depressing the clutch pedal until the engine is com- pletely started.

The engine can be started from any ENGINE START STOP switch mode.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

168

2-1. Driving procedures

Stopping the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission Stop the vehicle. Shift the shift lever to P. Set the parking brake. (P. 189) Release the brake pedal. Press the ENGINE START STOP switch. Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) is off.

Vehicles with a manual transmission While depressing the clutch pedal, stop the vehicle. Shift the shift lever to N. Set the parking brake. (P. 189) Release the clutch pedal. Press the ENGINE START STOP switch. Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) is off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

169

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Changing ENGINE START STOP switch mode Modes can be changed by pressing the ENGINE START STOP switch with the brake pedal (vehicles with an automatic transmis- sion) or clutch pedal (vehicles with a manual transmission) released. (The mode changes each time the switch is pressed.)

Off*

The emergency flashers can be used.

The smart key system indicator light (green) is off.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components such as the power outlet can be used.

The smart key system indicator light (green) flashes slowly.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can be used.

The smart key system indicator light (green) flashes slowly.

*: Vehicles with an automatic transmission: If the shift lever is in a position other than P when turning off the engine, the ENGINE START STOP switch will be turned to ACCESSORY mode, not to off.

170

2-1. Driving procedures

When stopping the engine with the shift lever in a position other than P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

If the engine is stopped with the shift lever in a position other than P, the ENGINE START STOP switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. Perform the following procedure to turn the switch off:

Check that the parking brake is set. Shift the shift lever to P. Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) flashes slowly and then press the ENGINE START STOP switch once. Check that the smart key system indicator light (green) is off.

Auto power off function Vehicles with an automatic transmission If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI- TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour with the shift lever in P, the ENGINE START STOP switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the ENGINE START STOP switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not run- ning. Vehicles with a manual transmission If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes or IGNI- TION ON mode (the engine is not running) for more than an hour, the ENGINE START STOP switch will automatically turn off. However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not leave the vehicle with the ENGINE START STOP switch in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

171

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Operation of the ENGINE START STOP switch If the switch is not pressed shortly and firmly, the ENGINE START STOP switch mode may not change or the engine may not start.

Electronic key battery depletion P. 35

Conditions affecting operation P. 31

Note for the entry function P. 32

If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 79) Contact your Toyota dealer.

Steering lock After turning the ENGINE START STOP switch off and opening and closing the doors, the steering wheel will be locked due to the steering lock function. Operating the ENGINE START STOP switch again automatically cancels the steering lock.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Check that the shift lever is securely set in P. The engine may not start if the shift lever is displaced out of P. The smart key system indicator light (green) will flash quickly.

172

2-1. Driving procedures

When the steering lock cannot be released

Steering lock motor overheating prevention To prevent the steering lock motor from overheating, the motor may be sus- pended if the engine is turned on and off repeatedly in a short period of time. In this case, refrain from operating the engine. After about 10 seconds, the steering lock motor will resume functioning.

If the smart key system indicator flashes in yellow and a message is displayed on the multi-information display The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

If the electronic key battery is depleted P. 363

If the smart key system has been deactivated in a customized setting P. 442

Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing the battery and so forth The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, how- ever, this is not a malfunction.

The smart key system indicator light (green) will flash quickly and a message will be shown on the multi-information dis- play. (P. 414) Vehicles with an automatic transmis- sion Check that the shift lever is set in P. Press the ENGINE START STOP switch while turning the steering wheel left and right. Vehicles with a manual transmission Press the ENGINE START STOP switch while turning the steering wheel left and right.

173

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the drivers seat. Do not depress

the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

If the smart key system indicator light flashes in green after the engine has started, never drive the vehicle. The steering wheel is still locked, and it may result in an accident.

Caution while driving If engine failure occurs while the vehicle is moving, do not lock or open the doors until the vehicle reaches a safe and complete stop. Activation of the steering lock in this circumstance may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Stopping the engine in an emergency If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle, press and hold the ENGINE START STOP switch for more than 2 seconds, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 455) However, do not touch the ENGINE START STOP switch while driving except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

174

2-1. Driving procedures

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the ENGINE START STOP switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode for long periods of time without the engine running. If the smart key system indicator light (green) is illuminated, the ENGINE

START STOP switch is not off. When exiting the vehicle, always check that the ENGINE START STOP switch is off.

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not stop the engine when the shift lever is in a position other than P. If the engine is stopped in another shift lever position, the ENGINE START STOP switch will not be turned off but instead be turned to ACCESSORY mode. If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode, battery discharge may occur.

When starting the engine Do not race a cold engine. If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-

cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately. Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the shift lever while

the starter is operating. Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the ENGINE START STOP

switch If the ENGINE START STOP switch seems to be operating somewhat dif- ferently than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a mal- function. Contact your Toyota dealer immediately.

175

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Engine (ignition) switch (vehicles without a smart key system)

Starting the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in P. Firmly depress the brake pedal. Turn the engine switch to the START position to start the engine.

Vehicles with a manual transmission Check that the parking brake is set. Check that the shift lever is set in N. Firmly depress the clutch pedal. Turn the engine switch to the START position to start the engine.

Changing the engine switch positions LOCK

The steering wheel is locked and the key can be removed. (Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The key can be removed only when the shift lever is in P.)

ACC

Some electrical components such as the power outlet can be used.

ON

All electrical components can be used.

START

For starting the engine.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

176

2-1. Driving procedures

Turning the key from ACC to LOCK Shift the shift lever to N (manual transmission) or P (automatic transmission). (P. 178, 185)

If the engine does not start The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 79) Contact your Toyota dealer.

When the steering lock cannot be released

Key reminder function A buzzer sounds if the drivers door is opened while the engine switch is in the LOCK or ACC position to remind you to remove the key.

Immediately after reconnecting the battery terminals due to replacing the battery and so forth The engine may not start. If this occurs, turn the engine switch to the ON position, and start the engine after waiting at least 10 seconds. Idling may be unstable immediately after the engine starts, however, this is not a malfunc- tion.

STEP 1

Push in the key and turn to the LOCK position.

STEP 2

When starting the engine, the engine switch may seem stuck in the LOCK position. To free it, turn the key while turn- ing the steering wheel slightly left and right.

177

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When starting the engine Always start the engine while sitting in the driver's seat. Do not depress the accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Caution when driving Do not turn the engine switch to the LOCK position while driving. If, in an emergency, you must turn the engine off while the vehicle is moving, turn the engine switch only to the ACC position to stop the engine. An accident may result if the engine is stopped while driving. (P. 455)

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the engine switch in the ACC or ON position for long periods of time without the engine running.

When starting the engine Do not crank the engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. This may

overheat the starter and wiring system. If the engine does not start, turn the engine switch to the LOCK position and try to start the engine again after waiting for 10 seconds or more.

Do not race a cold engine. If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-

cle checked by your Toyota dealer immediately. Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Do not shift the shift lever while

the starter is operating.

178

2-1. Driving procedures

Automatic transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

Shifting the shift lever

Vehicles without a smart key system While the engine switch is in the ON position, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

Vehicles with a smart key system While the ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode, move the shift lever with the brake pedal depressed. When shifting the shift lever between P and D, make sure that the vehicle is completely stopped.

: If equipped

179

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Shift position uses

*: Shifting to the D position allows the system to select a gear suitable for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the D position is recom- mended for normal driving.

Shift position

Multi-information display FunctionMonochrome

display Color display

P Parking the vehicle/start- ing the engine

R Reversing

N Neutral

D

Normal D position driving* (gears between 1 and 6

are automatically selected)

(paddle shift switches activated)

(paddle shift switches activated)

Temporary manual mode driving (P. 183)

M Manual mode driving (P. 181)

180

2-1. Driving procedures

Selecting a driving mode By pressing the driving pattern selector switch the following modes can be selected to suit driving and usage conditions:

Normal mode Sport mode The SPORT indicator comes on.

Use sport mode for sporty driving or when driving in mountainous regions with lots of curves.

Snow mode The SNOW indicator comes on.

Use snow mode for accelerating and driving on slippery road surfaces such as snow.

To cancel sport mode or snow mode, press the same side of the switch again.

181

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Manual mode driving

To enter manual mode, shift the shift lever to the M position.

While the upshift/downshift indicator light is illuminated, gears can be selected by operating the shift lever or paddle shift switches, allowing you to drive in the gear of your choosing.

Even if upshifting operations are performed, if vehicle speed is too low for the requested gear, the gear will not change.

Upshift indicator Downshift indicator Upshifting (+) Downshifting (-)

Each time the shift lever or pad- dle shift switches are operated, the gear changes up or down one gear and the selected gear, 1 through 6, will be set.

The selected gear, from 1 to 6, and M will be displayed on the shift position and shift range indi- cator.

*1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

*2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

When in manual mode, the gear will not change unless the shift lever or paddle shift switches are operated.

However, even when in manual mode, the gears will be automatically changed in the following situations:

When vehicle speed drops (downshift only).

*1

*2

182

2-1. Driving procedures

When engine oil temperature is high and engine speed rises close to the red zone.

When moving the shift lever out of P If the shift lever is pushed sideways before the brake pedal is depressed, shift lever operation may not be possible. Depress the brake pedal before shifting the shift lever out of P.

Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer If downshifting operations are performed at a vehicle speed by which down- shifting is not possible (when downshifting will cause the engine speed to enter the red zone), a buzzer will sound to warn the driver that downshifting cannot be performed.

When driving with cruise control activated Downshifting can be performed even when using cruise control. After down- shifting, the set speed continues. (P. 181, 183)

Sport mode In sport mode, lower gears are used and gears change at a higher

engine speed. If sport mode is changed to while the shift lever is in the M position, the

SPORT indicator will come on but sport mode controls will not be car- ried out. Shift the shift lever to the D position.

Sport mode cannot be changed to when driving with cruise control acti- vated.

Snow mode To prevent slipping, 1st gear cannot be selected when in snow mode.

Sport mode and snow mode automatic deactivation In the following situations, the driving mode is automatically deactivated: When the engine is turned off after driving in sport mode or snow mode. When cruise control is activated while driving in sport mode.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P P. 439

183

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Automatic gear selection when the vehicle is stopped When the vehicle is idling at high rpm in order to warm up, and the vehicle is on a slippery road, the transmission may automatically shift to 2nd gear for stopping and starting off.

Temporary manual mode driving

*1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

*2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display Temporary manual mode driving will be deactivated and normal D position driving will be returned to in the following situations: When driving for longer than the set time (the set time differs according

to driving conditions). When the vehicle comes to a stop. When the accelerator pedal is continually depressed for longer than the

set time. When the accelerator pedal is fully, or near-fully, depressed.

Temporary manual mode driving can be changed to by operating the paddle shift switches while the shift lever is in the D position. When this occurs, the selected gear and D are displayed on the shift position and shift range indicator. (When engine speed rises close to the red zone, upshifting will be automatically performed.)

*1 *2

184

2-1. Driving procedures

AI-SHIFT The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position according to the driver performance and driving conditions. The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the D posi- tion. (Operating the paddle shift switches or shifting the shift lever to the M position cancels the function.)

WARNING

When driving on slippery road surfaces Be careful of downshifting and sudden acceleration, as this could result in the vehicle skidding to the side or spinning.

To prevent incorrect operation Do not attach items such as accessories to the paddle shift switches. Doing so may unintentionally move the paddle shift switches.

185

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Manual Transmission

: If equipped

Shifting the shift lever

Fully depress the clutch pedal before operating the shift lever, and then release it slowly.

Shifting the shift lever to R Shift the shift lever to R while lifting up the ring section.

186

2-1. Driving procedures

Shift position indicator

The selected shift position will be displayed on the multi-informa- tion display.

The selected shift position will not appear in the following situations:

When the shift lever is in N. When the vehicle speed is 6

mph (10 km/h) or less (except when the shift lever is in R)

When the clutch pedal is depressed.

The default setting of the indicator is off. The indicator can be turned on/off. (P. 204, 217)

*1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

*2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

Shift-up indicator

To help enable fuel-efficient driv- ing, the shift-up indicator flashes 3 times to indicate upshift timing.

The default setting of the indicator is off. The indicator can be turned on/off. (P. 204, 217)

*1: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

*2: Vehicles with a color multi-information display

*1 *2

*1 *2

187

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the transmission

Do not lift up the ring section except when shifting the lever to R. Shift the shift lever to R only when the vehicle is stationary and the clutch

pedal is fully depressed.

Do not shift the shift lever without depressing the clutch pedal.

188

2-1. Driving procedures

Turn signal lever

Turn signals can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

If the indicators flash faster than usual Check that a light bulb in the turn signal lights has not burned out.

The turn signal lever can be used to show the following intentions of the driver:

Right turn Left turn Lane change to the right (push and hold the lever partway)

The right hand signals will flash until you release the lever.

Lane change to the left (push and hold the lever partway)

The left hand signals will flash until you release the lever.

189

2-1. Driving procedures

2

W hen driving

Parking brake

Usage in winter time P. 261

NOTICE

Before driving Fully release the parking brake. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake wear.

To set the parking brake, fully pull the parking brake lever while depressing the brake pedal. To release the parking brake, slightly raise the lever and lower it completely while pressing the button.

U.S.A. Canada

190

2-1. Driving procedures

Horn

After adjusting the steering wheel Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked. The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked. (P. 67)

To sound the horn, press on or close to the mark.

191

2

W hen driving

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

With monochrome display

With color display

Analog Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed.

Tachometer Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute.

Fuel gauge Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank.

192

2-2. Instrument cluster

Instrument panel light control

The brightness of the instrument panel lights can be adjusted.

Brighter Darker

Engine coolant temperature gauge (if equipped) Displays the engine coolant temperature.

Digital Speedometer Displays the vehicle speed.

Multi-information display, odometer and trip meter P. 200, 207

DISP switch (if equipped) P. 203

ODO/TRIP switch P. 202

km/h MPH switch Each time the switch is pressed, the display inside the meter changes between km/h and MPH.

193

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

The meters and display illuminate when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

The brightness of the instrument panel lights When the parking lights or the headlights turn on, the instrument panel lights will dim. However, when the instrument panel brightness control dial is turned to the up most position, the instrument panel lights will not dim even when the parking lights or headlights turn on.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the engine and its components Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed. In the following situations, the engine may be overheating. In this case,

immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 450) Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine

coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant

temperature warning light flashes or illuminates

194

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen- ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicles various sys- tems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all indicators and warning lights illuminated.

Instrument cluster (with monochrome display)

Instrument cluster (with color display)

195

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Center panel

196

2-2. Instrument cluster

Indicators The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the vehicles various systems.

Turn signal indicator (P. 188)

Shift-up indicator (P. 186)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

Headlight high beam indicator (P. 223) (Blue)

(If equipped)

Low engine coolant temperature indicator

(If equipped)

Front fog light indicator (P. 228)

Slip indicator (P. 246)

Security indicator (P. 79, 82)

Hill-start assist control ON indicator (P. 252)

(If equipped)

Smart key system indi- cator (P. 166)

TRAC OFF indicator (P. 246)

Shift position and shift range indicator (P. 179)

VSC off indicator (P. 247)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Upshift/downshift indi- cator (P. 181, 183)

TRACK indicator (P. 247)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

SPORT indicator (P. 180)

(Red)

REV indicator (P. 156)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

SNOW indicator (P. 180)

(Green)

Cruise control indicator (P. 232)

(Vehicles with an automatic transmission)

Shift position indicator (P. 186)

SET indicator (P. 232)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

*2

*1, 3

*3

*1

*1

197

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

*1: Vehicles without a smart key system These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Vehicles with a smart key system These lights turn on when the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehi- cle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

*2: This indicator turns on when the engine coolant temperature is low.

*3: The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

*4: When the outside temperature is approximately 37F (3C) or lower, the indicator will illuminate.

(If equipped)

Low outside tempera- ture indicator (P. 219)

Airbag on-off indicator (P. 128)

*4

198

2-2. Instrument cluster

Warning lights Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the vehicles systems. (P. 396, 408)

*1: Vehicles without a smart key system These lights turn on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

Vehicles with a smart key system These lights turn on when the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being performed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehi- cle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

*2: The light flashes in yellow to indicate a malfunction. The light flashes quickly in green to indicate that the steering lock has not been released.

*3: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.

(Red) (If equipped)

(U.S.A.) (Canada) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (If equipped)

(Yellow) (U.S.A.) (Canada) (If equipped) (Yellow)

(for driver) (for the front pas- senger)

(If equipped) (If equipped)

*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *1

*1 *1 *1 *1 *1 *2 *3 *1

*1 *1 *4 *1

199

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

WARNING

If a safety system warning light does not come on Should a safety system light such as the ABS and SRS warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immedi- ately if this occurs.

*4: Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display only: This light turns on when the engine switch is turned to the ON position to indicate that a system check is being performed. It will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few seconds. There may be a malfunction in a system if the light does not come on or turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer for details.

200

2-2. Instrument cluster

Multi-information display (monochrome display)

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi-information display can also be used to change the meter set- tings.

Odometer

Trip meter

Outside temperature

Current fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Setting screen for the shift position indicator and shift- up indicator (vehicles with a manual transmission)

Setting screen for the REV indicator

201

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Switch the display

Pressing the ODO/TRIP switch or DISP switch displays the follow- ing information respectively:

ODO/TRIP switch Odometer Trip meter Setting screen for the shift posi-

tion indicator and shift-up indica- tor (vehicles with a manual transmission) DISP switch

Outside temperature Current fuel consumption Average fuel consumption Setting screen for the REV indica-

tor

202

2-2. Instrument cluster

Changing the display using the ODO/TRIP switch Each time the ODO/TRIP switch is pressed, the display changes as follows.

Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter*1

Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

Setting screen for the shift position indicator and shift-up indica- tor*2 (vehicles with a manual transmission) P. 204

*1: Pressing and holding the ODO/TRIP switch will reset the trip meter that is currently displayed.

*2: Only displayed when the engine switch is in the ACC or LOCK posi- tion.

203

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Changing the display using the DISP switch Each time the DISP switch is pressed, the display changes as fol- lows.

Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C).

Current fuel consumption Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption Displays the average fuel consumption since the function was reset.

The function can be reset by pushing the DISP switch for longer than one second when the average fuel consumption is displayed.

Use the displayed average fuel consumption as a reference.

Setting screen for the REV indicator* P. 204

*: Only displayed when the vehicle is stopped.

204

2-2. Instrument cluster

Setting the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator (vehicles with a manual transmission)

Displaying of the shift position indicator and shift-up indicator can be turned on/off.

Press the ODO/TRIP switch repeatedly until the setting screen is displayed. (P. 202) Each time the switch is pressed and held, the display changes between on/off.

G-on: Display on

G-oFF: Display off

Setting the REV indicator

Changing the REV indicator settings The engine speed at which the REV indicator turns on at and whether a buzzer sounds or not when the light turns on can be set.

Engine speed setting range: From 2000 to 7400 rpm (r/min)

Press the DISP switch repeatedly until the setting screen is displayed. (P. 203)

Press and hold the DISP switch.

REV. and the thousandth place flash. After flashing, the number changes each time the button is pressed and held.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

205

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Press the DISP switch.

The hundredth place flashes. After flashing, the number changes each time the button is pressed and held.

Press the DISP switch. A buzzer sounds once, and setting of the engine speed value is complete.

Press and hold the DISP switch.

Each time the DISP switch is pressed and held, the buzzer changes between activated and deactivated. b-on: Buzzer activated b-oFF: Buzzer deactivated When the setting changes from b-oFF to b-on, the buzzer sounds 3 times.

Press the DISP switch. When the buzzer sounds, all settings have been completed. The set- tings are displayed.

Deactivating the REV indicator settings After setting the thousandth place to -, press the DISP switch once.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

206

2-2. Instrument cluster

Outside temperature display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be

displayed. When the vehicle is very hot, such as when under the sun. When the vehicle is idling or being driven at low speeds such as in a

traffic jam or when the engine is stopped and then restarted immedi- ately afterward.

When the actual outside temperature is outside of the indicator range. If is displayed for approximately 1 minute or more or if the outside

temperature is not displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the driver's shifting and the new shift position number appearing on the display. In this case, wait until the display changes and take care not to downshift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

207

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Multi-information display (color display)

Summary of functions

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of driv- ing-related data, such as the current outside temperature. The multi- information display can also be used to change the meter settings.

Meter control switches (P. 208) ODO/TRIP switch (P. 208) Menu icons (P. 209) The menu icon bar will be displayed momentarily when the meter control switch is used to change the displayed content.

Content display area A variety of information can be displayed by selecting a menu icon. Addi- tionally, a warning message will be displayed in some situations.

Menu icon content (P. 209) Warning message (P. 218, 408)

Odometer/trip meter display area (P. 219) Displays the following items:

Odometer/trip meter Outside temperature

208

2-2. Instrument cluster

Using the multi-information display

Using the content display area The content display area is operated using the meter control switches.

: Select menu icons : Change displayed

content, scroll up/ down the screen and move the cursor

: Enter : Return to the previ-

ous screen For information pertaining to the content of each menu icon, refer to the explanation of each item under the heading of the relevant menu icon.

Using the odometer/trip meter display area Items in this area are operated using the ODO/TRIP switch.

Press: Change displayed item

Each time the switch is pressed, the displayed item changes in the order of odometer trip meter A trip meter B.

Press and hold: Reset

Display the desired trip meter and press and hold the switch to reset the trip meter.

209

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Menu icons

Select a menu icon to display its content.

Drive information (P. 210)

Select to display various drive data.

Exclusive content for 86 (P. 212)

Select to display the G-force display, stopwatch, and other useful functions for sporty driving.

Settings display (P. 217)

Select to change the meter display settings.

Warning message display (P. 218, 408)

Select to display warning messages and measures to be taken if a malfunction is detected.

210

2-2. Instrument cluster

Drive information ( )

Drive information (page 1) Current fuel consumption

Displays the current rate of fuel consumption.

Average fuel consumption

Displays the average fuel con- sumption since the function was reset.

Driving range

Displays the estimated maximum distance that can be driven with the quantity of fuel remaining.

Pressing and holding will reset the average fuel consump- tion.

Use the displayed fuel consumption as a reference.

This distance is computed based on your average fuel con- sumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

When only a small amount of fuel is added to the tank, the dis- play may not be updated. When refueling, turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off. If the vehicle is refueled without turning the ENGINE START STOP switch off, the display may not be updated.

211

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Drive information (page 2) Average vehicle speed

Displays the average vehicle speed since display was reset.

Driving time

Displays the cumulative time the vehicle has been driven since dis- play was reset.

Driving distance

Displays the cumulative distance the vehicle has been driven since display was reset.

Pressing and holding will reset the average vehicle speed/ driving time/driving distance.

Drive information (page 3) Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant tem- perature. If the engine coolant temperature gauge needle/indicator enters the red zone, a buzzer will sound and a warning message will be dis- played.

Engine oil temperature gauge

Displays the engine oil tempera- ture.

Voltmeter

Displays the charging voltage.

As voltage displayed may be different from the actual battery voltage, use the volt- meter as a guideline.

212

2-2. Instrument cluster

Pressing and holding will turn the range value display on the engine coolant temperature gauge display on/off.

Exclusive content for 86 ( )

G-force Displays lateral G-forces on the vehicle

Also displays, around the periphery of the G-force display, the left and right steering amount, accelerator pedal input, and brake fluid pres- sure

The following 2 screens are available for displaying G-force

Normal display screen: Suitable for confirming current lateral G-forces on the vehicle

Peak-hold display screen: Suitable for confirming the size and direction of the maximum lateral G-forces on the vehicle

213

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Reading the display

Record of the maximum G- forces Displayed on the peak-hold

display screen only To reset the record of maxi-

mum G-forces, press and hold while the peak-hold display

screen is displayed. Current G-force value (ana- lyzed value of front/rear and left/right G-forces)

G-force values that can be dis- played

Front/Rear: Up to 1.3 G

Left/Right: Up to 2.5 G

G-force ball trace

The maximum number of ball trace segments for the normal display screen is 20 and 10 for the peak-hold display screen.

G-force ball (acceleration G- forces on the vehicle)

214

2-2. Instrument cluster

Scale of the G-force display

The scale of the record of the maximum G-forces and G-force ball trace can be changed between 1.0 G and 0.5 G by pressing and holding while the normal display screen is dis- played.

Accelerator pedal input Brake fluid pressure Steering amount

If the steering wheel is turned completely to the left or right, the bottom side of the gauge on the corresponding side will be illumi- nated in red.

This display is intended for use as a guideline. Depending on factors such as the road surface condition, temperature and vehicle speed, the display may not show the actual condition of the vehicle.

Power and torque curve Power output Torque Current engine speed

The vertical bar will slide laterally according to the current engine speed.

This chart is intended for reference only and does not show the actual engine torque or output.

215

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Stopwatch Measures and displays current lap time and previous lap times

Fastest lap time (top screen) When the timer is reset, will be displayed.

Fastest lap time (measurement screen) Current lap time Total lap time Past lap times Records of the 50 most recent lap times will be displayed.

Meter control switch operation guide Changing between the stopwatch screens

To change to the measurement screen: Press .

To change to the top screen: Press .

Top screen Measurement screen

216

2-2. Instrument cluster

Operating the measurement screen

: Start/stop measure- ment

: Mark off one lap : Reset measured lap

times : Scroll through the

lap times

Resetting measured lap times

After stopping the measurement, press .

To display other content while the stopwatch is operating

If the measurement screen is displayed, press to display the top screen. Then operate the meter control switches to display other content. While other items are displayed, the measurement will continue but the stopwatch cannot be operated.

217

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Settings display ( )

Use the meter control switches on the steering wheel to change set- tings.

Press or to select . Operate the switches to select a desired item.

Press / or / to change the setting and then

press to confirm the change.

Item Settings Details

Welcome screen

On Select to enable/disable the welcome screen when the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

Off

REV.

RPM --00 rpm (OFF) ~ 7400 rpm

Select to enable/disable the REV indi- cator and set the engine speed at which the REV indicator will be illumi- nated. To disable, select -- for the engine speed (--00 rpm) Selectable engine speed range: 2000 to 7400 rpm

Buzzer

On Select to enable/disable the sounding of a buzzer when the REV indicator is illuminated. This setting can be changed only when the REV indicator is enabled.

Off

GSI (vehicles with a manual transmis- sion)

On Select to enable/disable the shift posi- tion indicator and shift-up indicator. (P. 186)Off

Language

English Select to change the language dis- played.French

Spanish

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

218

2-2. Instrument cluster

Warning message ( )

Select to display warning messages related to situations such as a vehicle malfunction.

If there is more than one message to be displayed, press / to change the display.

If there are no warning mes- sages to be displayed, a mes- sage indicating so will be displayed.

Units

km, km/h, km/l

Select to change the units of measure displayed.

km, km/h, l/100km

miles, MPH, MPG

Initialization Yes Select to reset the meter display set-

tings to the default setting.No

Item Settings Details

219

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

Odometer/trip meter display area

Odometer Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter A/trip meter B Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and display different distances independently.

To reset, display the desired trip meter and press and hold the ODO/ TRIP switch.

Outside temperature Displays the outside temperature within the range of -40F (-40C) to 122F (50C). Low outside temperature indicator comes on when the ambient temperature is 37F (3C) or lower.

220

2-2. Instrument cluster

G-force display Depending on the vehicle usage conditions, the brake fluid pressure dis-

play may not reach its maximum reading even though the brake pedal is fully depressed.

If a battery terminal is disconnected and reconnected, the steering amount display may be disabled temporarily. After driving the vehicle for a while, the display will be enabled.

Suspension of the settings display The settings cannot be changed while driving. When changing settings,

park the vehicle in a safe place. If a warning message is displayed, operation of the settings display will

be suspended. Using the stopwatch

If the engine is stopped while the stopwatch is operating, the stopwatch will stop and the time up to that point will be recorded.

Outside temperature display In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be

displayed. When the vehicle is very hot, such as when under the sun. When the vehicle is idling or being driven at low speeds such as in a

traffic jam or when the engine is stopped and then restarted immedi- ately afterward.

When the actual outside temperature is outside of the indicator range. If is displayed for approximately 1 minute or more or if the outside

temperature is not displayed, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

Liquid crystal display Small spots or light spots may appear on the display. This phenomenon is characteristic of liquid crystal displays, and there is no problem continuing to use the display.

221

2-2. Instrument cluster

2

W hen driving

WARNING

Caution for use while driving When operating the multi-information display while driving, pay extra

attention to the safety of the area around the vehicle. Do not look continuously at the multi-information display while driving as

you may fail to see pedestrians, objects on the road, etc. ahead of the vehicle.

The information display at low temperatures Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the liquid crystal information display. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed. For example, there is a lag between the drivers shifting and the new gear number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down- shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an accident resulting in death or injury.

Cautions during setting up the display As the engine needs to be running during setting up the display, ensure that the vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

NOTICE

While setting up the display To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while setting up the display features.

222

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

Operating the switch turns on the lights as follows:

Off

The daytime running lights turn on. (P. 224)

The headlights, park- ing/daytime running lights (P. 224) and so on turn on and off auto- matically. (Vehicles without a smart key system: When the engine switch is in the ON position Vehicles with a smart key system: When the ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode) The side marker, park- ing, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights turn on. The headlights and all the lights listed above (except daytime run- ning lights) turn on.

223

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

2

W hen driving

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push the lever forward to turn on the high beams.

Pull the lever back to the center position to turn the high beams off.

Pull the lever toward you and release it to flash the high beams once.

You can flash the high beams with the headlights on or off.

224

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Daytime running light system The daytime running lights illuminate using the same lights as the parking

lights and illuminate brighter than the parking lights. To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers during daytime driving,

the daytime running lights turn on automatically when all of the following conditions are met. (The daytime running lights are not designed for use at night.) The engine is running The shift lever is shifted out of P (Vehicles with an automatic transmis-

sion) The parking brake is released The headlight switch is off or in the AUTO* position

*:When the surroundings are bright The daytime running lights remain on after they illuminate even if the parking brake is set again. When the turn signal indicators are flashing, the daytime running light on

the side that the turn signals are flashing will turn off. When the emergency flashers are flashing, both daytime running lights

will turn off. Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system

offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help improve fuel economy.

225

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

2

W hen driving

Headlight control sensor

Automatic light off system Vehicles without a smart key system The light switch is in , the headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec- onds after a door is opened and closed if the engine switch is turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.) To turn the lights on again, turn the engine switch to ON position, or turn

the light switch off and then back to or .

Vehicles with a smart key system The light switch is in , the headlights and tail lights turn off 30 sec- onds after a door is opened and closed if the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned off. (The lights turn off immediately if on the key is pressed after all the doors are locked.) To turn the lights on again, turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off and then back to or

.

Headlight control sensor is located on the passenger's side. The sensor may not function properly if an object is placed on the sensor, or any- thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to the windshield. Doing so interferes with the sensor detecting the level of ambient light and may cause the automatic headlight sys- tem to malfunction.

226

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Light reminder buzzer Vehicles without a smart key system A buzzer sounds when the engine switch is turned to LOCK position and the driver's door is opened with the key removed from the engine switch while the lights are turned on. Vehicles with a smart key system A buzzer sounds when the lights are left on with the ENGINE START STOP switch off and the drivers door is opened.

Automatic headlight leveling system The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the headlights do not interfere with other road users.

Battery-saving function In the following conditions, the headlights and the other remaining lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes in order to prevent the vehicle battery from being discharged: The headlights and/or tail lights are on. The key is removed from the engine switch (vehicles without a smart key

system) or the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned off (vehicles with a smart key system).

The light switch is in or . This function will be canceled in any of the following situations: When the engine switch is turned to the ON position (vehicles without a

smart key system) or the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system).

When the light switch is turned off. When the door is opened or closed.

Customization that can be configured at your Toyota dealer Settings of the light sensor sensitivity can be changed. (Customizable features P. 487)

227

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

2

W hen driving

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run- ning.

228

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

Fog light switch

Fog lights can be used when The headlights are on in low beam.

The fog lights secure excellent visibility in difficult driving condi- tions, such as in rain and fog.

Turns the front fog lights off Turns the front fog lights on

: If equipped

229

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

2

W hen driving

Windshield wipers and washer

When intermittent windshield wiper operation is selected, the wiper interval can be adjusted.

Operating the lever operates the wipers or washer as fol- lows.

Intermittent windshield wiper operation Low speed windshield wiper operation High speed windshield wiper operation Temporary operation

Decreases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency Increases the intermittent windshield wiper frequency

230

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

The windshield wipers and washer can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

If no windshield washer fluid sprays Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked if there is washer fluid in the windshield washer fluid tank.

WARNING

Caution regarding the use of washer fluid When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

Washer/wiper dual operation

Pulling the lever operates the wipers and washer.

The wipers will automatically operate a couple of times after the washer squirts.

231

2-3. Operating the lights and windshield wipers

2

W hen driving

NOTICE

When the windshield is dry Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

When the washer fluid tank is empty Do not operate the switch continually as the washer fluid pump may over- heat.

When a nozzle becomes blocked In this case, contact your Toyota dealer. Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

232

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Indicators Cruise control switch

Setting the vehicle speed

Press the ON-OFF button to activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator (green) will come on.

Press the button again to deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, and push the lever down to set the speed.

SET indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the moment the lever is released becomes the set speed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

233

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Adjusting the set speed To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set speed is obtained.

Increases the speed Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily move the lever in the desired direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment (vehicles with a km/h odometer display): By approxi- mately 0.6 mph (1 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Fine adjustment (vehicles with an mph odometer display): By approxi- mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h) each time the lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased con- tinually until the lever is released.

234

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control can be set when Vehicles with an automatic transmission The shift lever is in D or M and the vehicle is in the 2nd gear or higher. Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h). Vehicles with a manual transmission The vehicle is in the 2nd gear or higher. Vehicle speed is above approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

Canceling and resuming the constant speed control Pulling the lever toward you cancels the constant speed control.

The speed setting is also can- celed when the brakes are applied or the clutch pedal (manual transmission only) is depressed.

Pushing the lever up resumes the constant speed control.

Resuming is available when the vehicle speed is more than approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

235

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set

speed resumes. Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be

increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

Automatic cruise control cancelation Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following situations. Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). VSC is activated.

The system may be malfunctioning when In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehi- cle inspected by your Toyota dealer. The cruise control indicator light comes on in yellow. The cruise control indicator does not come on even when the ON-OFF

button is pressed while the engine is running.

236

2-4. Using other driving systems

WARNING

To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake Switch the cruise control off using the ON-OFF button when not in use.

Situations unsuitable for cruise control Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations. Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. In heavy traffic On roads with sharp bends On winding roads On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill. During emergency towing

237

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Rear view monitor system

The rear view monitor assists the driver by displaying an image of the area behind the vehicle while reversing. The image is displayed in reverse on the screen. This reversed image is a similar image to the one on the inside rear view mirror.

The rear view image will be displayed on the rear view monitor within a few seconds after the shift lever is shifted to R.

When the shift lever is shifted to a position other than R, the image will continue to be dis- played for approximately 5 seconds.

Screen Automatic transmission Manual transmission

238

2-4. Using other driving systems

Displayed area

The area behind the rear bumper can be displayed. Areas on both the left and right side of the rear bumper and areas just under the rear bumper cannot be displayed.

The distance of the image dis- played on the screen will look shorter than the actual dis- tance.

Areas above the rear view camera cannot be displayed.

If there is an object behind the vehicle with a long protrusion on its upper part, such as a sign pole, the protruding part will not be displayed on the screen.

239

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Distance from the ground on the screen The distance markers show the distance from an object on level ground when the vehicle is unloaded. Depending on the loading condition and road condition, the distance shown on the screen may be different from the actual distance.

When there is an upward slope behind the vehicle A: 3 ft. (1 m)

The distance of the image on the screen will look farther than the actual distance.

When there is a downward slope behind the vehicle A: 3 ft. (1 m)

The distance of the image on the screen will look closer than the actual distance.

Distance markers 3 ft. (1 m) line 10 ft. (3 m) line

The distance markers show the distance from points on the road. If there is a car or other object close to the rear of the vehicle, the distance will not be displayed correctly.

240

2-4. Using other driving systems

Guide lines

The guide lines (distance markers and vehicle width lines) are a guide to help you realize the actual distance of points on the screen.

Vehicle width lines (oblique vertical lines) Approximately 10 ft. (3 m) from the bumper (green hori- zontal line) Approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the bumper (yellow horizontal line) Approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) from the bumper (red horizon- tal line) Vehicle centerline When the shift lever is shifted to R, the screen will display the guide lines together with the rear view image.

241

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Rear view monitor camera

In the following cases, it may be difficult to see images on the screen even when the system is functioning correctly: The vehicle is in a dark area, such

as at night. The temperature near the lens is

extremely high or low. Water droplets are on the camera

lens or humidity is high, such as when it rains.

Foreign matter, such as snow and mud, adheres to the camera lens.

The camera lens is scratched or has dirt on it.

The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.

A bright object such as a white wall is reflected in the mirror surface over the screen.

242

2-4. Using other driving systems

Smear effect

Flicker effect When the camera is used under fluorescent light, sodium lights, or mercury lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected off the vehicle body, is picked up by the camera, a smear effect* char- acteristic to the camera may occur. *: Smear effect A phenomenon that

occurs when a bright light is picked up by the camera; when transmitted by the camera, the light source appears to have a vertical streak above and below it.

243

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

WARNING

When using the rear view monitor system Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in death or serious injuries. The rear view monitor system is a supplement device intended to assist

back up. Never depend solely on the rear view monitor system when reversing. Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is clear. Use caution just as you would when backing up any vehicle.

The camera has a special lens. Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual distances.

Always check the vehicle surrounding area, because the guide lines are ancillary lines.

The guide lines are ancillary lines and do not change even if the steering wheel is turned.

Do not use the system if the trunk is open. Conditions which may affect the rear view monitor system

If the back of the vehicle has been hit, the cameras position and mounting angle may have changed. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

When the outside temperature is low, the displayed image may become faint or dark, and moving images will be distorted, or not entirely visible.

Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely dirty, wash with a mild cleanser and rinse.

If the tire size is changed, the area displayed on the screen may change. Do not do the following. Doing so may scratch the lens, which may have a

negative effect on the image displayed on the screen. Rub the camera lens hard Use a hard brush to scrub the camera lens Scrub the lens with abrasive cleaners

244

2-4. Using other driving systems

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the camera As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble

or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation. Take care so that organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat

does not adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as pos- sible.

245

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys- tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations. Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface

Brake assist Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is depressed when the system detects a panic stop situation

VSC (Vehicle Stability Control) Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning on slippery road surfaces

TRAC (Traction Control) Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the drive wheels from spin- ning when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads. The TRAC system is also equipped with the brake LSD function.

Hill-start assist control P. 252

EPS (Electric Power Steering) Employs an electric motor to reduce the amount of effort needed to turn the steering wheel

246

2-4. Using other driving systems

When the TRAC/VSC systems are operating

The slip indicator light will flash while the TRAC (brake LSD function)/VSC systems are oper- ating.

Disabling the TRAC system

If the vehicle gets stuck in mud, dirt or snow, the TRAC system may

reduce power from the engine to the wheels. Pressing to turn

the system off may make it easier for you to rock the vehicle in order to free it. In this case, the brake LSD function remains on.

To turn the TRAC system off, quickly press and release the button.

The TRAC OFF indicator light will come on.

Press the button again to turn the system back on.

247

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

TRACK mode

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of control modes to accom- modate various driving preferences. The control modes can be selected with the TRACK switch. Normal mode allows secure and smooth normal driving. When the switch is pressed and held for 1 second or more, TRACK mode is activated. Control characteristics such as the VSC and TRAC are adjusted to afford maneuverability closer to what a driver may desire, while a sense of security is retained.

TRACK mode/Normal mode

The TRACK indicator and VSC off indicator come on when in TRACK mode.

To change back to normal mode while in TRACK mode, press

or the TRACK switch.

Turning off both TRAC and VSC systems

To turn the TRAC and VSC systems off, press and hold for more than 3 seconds while the vehicle is stopped.

The TRAC OFF indicator light and the VSC off indicator light will come on. However, on vehicles with an automatic transmission, the brake LSD function will remain on.

Press the button again to turn the systems back on.

248

2-4. Using other driving systems

Selecting TRAC mode and VSC mode

Modes can be selected to suit your driving conditions as follows:

*1: Vehicles with an automatic transmission

*2: Vehicles with a manual transmission

Driving conditions

TRAC modes VSC modes Brake LSD

function Indicator lights

Normal roads

Normal mode

Normal mode

Normal mode

Rough roads Off Normal

mode Normal mode

Sport driving

TRACK mode

TRACK mode

TRACK mode

Off Off TRACK mode*1

Off*2

249

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Sounds and vibrations caused by the ABS, brake assist, TRAC and VSC systems A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the brake

pedal is depressed repeatedly, when the engine is started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indicate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred. Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering. A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop. The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the ABS is activated. The brake pedal may move down slightly after the ABS is activated.

EPS operation sound When the steering wheel is operated, a motor sound (whirring sound) may be heard. This does not indicate a malfunction.

Automatic reactivation of TRAC and VSC systems After turning the TRAC and VSC systems off, the systems will be automati- cally reactivated in the following situations: Vehicles without a smart key system: When the engine switch is turned to

LOCK position Vehicles with a smart key system: When the ENGINE START STOP

switch is turned off If only the TRAC system is turned off, the TRAC will turn on when vehicle

speed is more than approximately 31 mph (50 km/h). If both the TRAC and VSC systems are turned off, automatic reactivation will not occur when vehicle speed increases.

250

2-4. Using other driving systems

Reduced effectiveness of the EPS system The effectiveness of the EPS system is reduced to prevent the system from overheating when there is frequent steering input over an extended period of time. The steering wheel may feel heavy as a result. Should this occur, refrain from excessive steering input or stop the vehicle and turn the engine off. The EPS system should return to normal after a little while.

Automatic deactivation of TRACK mode Vehicles without a smart key system When the engine switch is turned to LOCK position after driving in TRACK mode, the mode is automatically deactivated. Vehicles with a smart key system When the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned off after driving in TRACK mode, the mode is automatically deactivated.

WARNING

The ABS does not operate effectively when Tires with inadequate gripping ability are used (such as excessively worn

tires on a snow covered road). The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on wet or slick roads.

Stopping distance when the ABS is operating may exceed that of nor- mal conditions The ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicles stopping distance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you in the following situ- ations: When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads When driving with tire chains When driving over bumps in the road When driving over roads with potholes or uneven surfaces

251

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

WARNING

TRAC may not operate effectively when Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip- pery road surfaces, even if the TRAC system is operating. Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

When the VSC and/or brake LSD function is activated The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully. Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the indicator light flashes.

When the TRAC/VSC systems are turned off Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi- tions. As these are the systems to help ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do not turn the TRAC/VSC systems off unless necessary.

Replacing tires Make sure that all tires are of the specified size, brand, tread pattern and total load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the recommended tire inflation pressure level. The ABS, TRAC and VSC systems will not function correctly if different tires are installed on the vehicle. Contact your Toyota dealer for further information when replacing tires or wheels.

Handling of tires and suspension Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect the driving assist systems, and may cause a system to malfunction.

252

2-4. Using other driving systems

Hill-start assist control

Hill-start assist control helps to maintain braking force to assist starting off forward while facing uphill or starting off backward while facing downhill. As hill-start assist control is initially disabled, enable the system to make it operable. The enabled/disabled setting will be maintained the next time the engine is started.

The hill-start assist control ON indicator will be illuminated when system is enabled and flash while the system is oper- ating.

Enabling hill-start assist control Park your vehicle in a flat, safe location. Make sure that the parking brake is securely engaged.

Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the LOCK position (vehicles without a smart key system) or turning the ENGINE START STOP switch off (vehicles with a smart key system). Start the engine and check that the ABS warning light and slip indicator are off.

Press and hold for

approximately 30 seconds.

Check that both the VSC off indicator and TRAC OFF indi- cator illuminate and then turn off.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

253

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

When enabling the hill-start assist control If the hill-start assist control ON indicator does not illuminate or if an

incorrect operation is performed, turn the engine switch to the LOCK position (vehicles without a smart key system) or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off (vehicles with a smart key system) and then restart the enabling procedure from .

If is pressed and held for approximately 30 seconds or more, the

VSC off indicator and TRAC OFF indicator will turn off and subsequent operations of the switch will be rejected. In this case, the VSC system will

operate in normal mode. (P. 248) To enable , turn the engine

switch to the ACC or LOCK position (vehicles without a smart key sys- tem) or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off (vehicles with a smart key system) and then restart the engine.

Within 5 seconds after the indicator lights turn off, release

. Then, press the switch again within 2 seconds of

releasing it. The hill-start assist control ON indicator will illuminate and then turn off.

Turn the engine switch to the LOCK position (vehicles without a smart key system) or turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off (vehicles with a smart key system). Then, restart the engine and check that the hill-start assist control ON indicator is illuminated. Hill-start assist control is enabled when the indicator is illumi- nated.

To disable hill-start assist control, perform the above through again.

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 1

STEP 6

STEP 4

254

2-4. Using other driving systems

Operating conditions of hill-start assist control When the following conditions are met, the hill-start assist control will oper- ate: Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in D or M

(when starting off forward on while facing uphill) or in R (when starting off backward while facing downhill).

Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in a position other than R (when starting off forward while facing uphill) or in R (when start- ing off backward while facing downhill).

The vehicle is stopped. The accelerator pedal is not depressed. The parking brake is not engaged.

Hill-start assist control will not operate when Hill-start assist control will not operate when any of the following conditions are met: Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in a position

other than D or M (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill).

Vehicles with a manual transmission: The shift lever is in R (when facing uphill) or in a position other than R (when facing downhill).

Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The accelerator pedal is depressed.

The parking brake is applied. Vehicles with a manual transmission: The clutch is engaged. Approximately 2 seconds have elapsed since the brake pedal was

released. The hill-start assist control ON indicator is not illuminated. Vehicles without a smart key system: The engine switch is turned to the

ACC or LOCK position. Vehicles with a smart key system: The ENGINE START STOP switch is

turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned off.

255

2-4. Using other driving systems

2

W hen driving

Notes for hill-start assist control A slight jolt may be felt when starting off backward with the shift lever in R

and then moving forward. If the braking power of hill-start assist control is insufficient, depress the

brake pedal. While the vehicle is stopped, make sure to depress the brake pedal.

The system may be malfunctioning when In the following situations, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehi- cle inspected by your Toyota dealer. The slip indicator is illuminated. The hill-start assist control ON indicator turns off and a buzzer sounds.

WARNING

Hill-start assist control precautions Do not overly rely on hill-start assist control. Hill-start assist control may

not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered with ice. Unlike the parking brake, hill-start assist control is not intended to hold the

vehicle stationary for an extended period of time. Do not attempt to use hill-start assist control to hold the vehicle on an incline, as doing so may lead to an accident.

Do not stop the engine while hill-start assist control is operating, as hill- start assist control will stop operating, possibly leading to an accident.

256

2-5. Driving information

Cargo and luggage

Capacity and distribution

Cargo capacity depends on the total weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capacity) - (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1)Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs. on your vehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4)The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and lug- gage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 150) = 650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the avail- able cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.

Take notice of the following information about storage precau- tions, cargo capacity and load:

Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible.

Be sure all items are secured in place.

To maintain vehicle balance while driving, position luggage evenly within the luggage compartment.

For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

257

2-5. Driving information

2

W hen driving

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle. (P. 458) Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed for trailer towing.

Calculation formula for your vehicle

Cargo capacity Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) (P. 458)

When 2 people with the combined weight of A lb. (kg) are riding in your vehicle, which has a total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight) of B lb. (kg), the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity will be C lb. (kg) as follows:

B*2 lb. (kg) - A*1 lb. (kg) = C*3 lb. (kg)

*1: A =Weight of people *2: B =Total load capacity *3: C =Available cargo and luggage load

In this condition, if 2 more passengers with the combined weight of D lb. (kg) get on, the available cargo and luggage load will be reduced E lb. (kg) as follows:

C lb. (kg) - D*4 lb. (kg) = E*5 lb. (kg)

*4: D =Additional weight of people *5: E =Available cargo and luggage load

258

2-5. Driving information

As shown in the example above, if the number of occupants increases, the cargo and luggage load will be reduced by an amount that equals the increased weight due to the additional occupants. In other words, if an increase in the number of occupants causes an excess of the total load capacity (combined weight of occupants plus cargo and luggage load), you must reduce the cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

WARNING

Things that must not be carried in the trunk The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the trunk: Receptacles containing gasoline Aerosol cans

259

2-5. Driving information

2

W hen driving

WARNING

Storage precautions Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury. Stow cargo and luggage in the trunk whenever possible. To prevent cargo and luggage from sliding forward during braking, do

not stack anything in the enlarged trunk. Keep cargo and luggage low, as close to the floor as possible.

When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed directly behind the front seats.

Never allow anyone to ride in the enlarged trunk. It is not designed for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop- erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or serious bodily injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the item may get under the clutch, brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from being depressed properly, block the drivers vision, or hit the driver or passengers, causing an accident: At the feet of the driver On the front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items) On the package tray On the instrument panel On the dashboard

Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an acci- dent.

Capacity and distribution Do not exceed the maximum axle weight rating or the total vehicle

weight rating. Even if the total load of occupant's weight and the cargo load is less

than the total load capacity, do not apply the load unevenly. Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control which may cause death or serious injury.

260

2-5. Driving information

Vehicle load limits

Total load capacity and seating capacity These details are described on the tire and loading information label. (P. 353)

WARNING

Overloading the vehicle Do not overload the vehicle. It may not only cause damage to the tires, but also degrade steering and braking ability, resulting in an accident.

Vehicle load limits include total load capacity, seating capacity, towing capacity and cargo capacity.

Total load capacity (vehicle capacity weight): (P. 458) Total load capacity means the combined weight of occupants, cargo and luggage.

Seating capacity Seating capacity means the maximum number of occupants whose estimated average weight is 150 lb. (68 kg) per person.

Towing capacity Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Cargo capacity Cargo capacity may increase or decrease depending on the weight and the number of occupants.

261

2-5. Driving information

2

W hen driving

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri- ate to the prevailing weather conditions.

Pre-winter preparations Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

Engine oil Washer fluid

Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires.

Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4 tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern.

Before driving the vehicle Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice. Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan, remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents in front of the windshield.

Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle's roof, chassis, around the tires or on the brakes.

Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes before getting in the vehicle.

262

2-5. Driving information

If a door is opened and closed when its side window is frozen, the window safety device will operate and the side window open/close function linked to door operation may not operate correctly. If this occurs, perform the following after the ice has melted.

Open the side window until it is approximately halfway open with the door closed. Fully close the window by pulling the switch up to the one- touch closing position and continue holding the switch for 1 second or more after the window fully closes. The window position is reset and the safety device operations will be released.

When driving the vehicle Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to road conditions.

When parking the vehicle (in the winter time or in the cold latitudes) Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to P (automatic trans- mission) or 1 or R (manual transmission) without setting the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent inadvertent sliding or creeping.

STEP 1

STEP 2

263

2-5. Driving information

2

W hen driving

Tire chains

Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle because of the lack of clearance between the tires and vehicle body.

When tire chains cannot be used, use of another type of traction device (such as spring chains) may be acceptable if use on your vehi- cle is recommended by the device manufacturer, taking into account tire size and road conditions. Follow the device manufacturer's instructions, especially regarding maximum vehicle speed.

To help avoid damage to your vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the device if it is contacting your vehicle, and do not spin your wheels. Damage caused to your vehicle by use of a traction device is not covered under warranty.

Make certain that any traction device you use is an SAE class S device, and use it on the rear wheels only. Always use the utmost care when driving with a traction device. Over- confidence because you are using a traction device could easily lead to a serious accident.

Selecting tire chains

We recommend that you consult your Toyota dealer for information about the chains that you can use.

264

2-5. Driving information

WARNING

Driving with snow tires Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents. Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or serious injury. Use tires of the specified size, and that are the same size, same

maker, same brand and tread pattern. Maintain the recommended level of air pressure. Do not drive in excess of 75 mph (120 km/h), regardless of the type of

snow tires being used. Use snow tires on all, not just some wheels.

NOTICE

Repairing or replacing snow tires Request repairs or replacement of snow tires from Toyota dealers or legitimate tire retailers. This is because the removal and attachment of snow tires affects the operation of the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters.

Fitting tire chains The tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not function cor- rectly when tire chains are fitted.

265

2-5. Driving information

2

W hen driving

Trailer towing

Toyota does not recommend towing a trailer with your vehicle. Toyota also does not recommend the installation of a tow hitch or the use of a tow hitch carrier for a wheelchair, scooter, bicycle, etc. Your Toyota is not designed for trailer towing or for the use of tow hitch mounted carriers.

266

2-5. Driving information

Dinghy towing

NOTICE

To avoid serious damage to your vehicle Do not tow your vehicle with four wheels on the ground.

Your vehicle is not designed to be dinghy towed (with 4 wheels on the ground) behind a motor home.

Interior features 3

267

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system ........................... 268

Automatic air conditioning system ........................... 275

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers....................... 284

3-2. Using the audio system Using the AUX/

USB port ........................ 286 Steering wheel audio

switches ......................... 287 Using the microphone...... 288

3-3. Using the interior lights Interior lights list ............... 289 Interior light .................... 290

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features .... 291 Glove box....................... 292 Bottle holders................. 293 Cup holders/

console tray ................... 294

3-5. Other interior features Sun visors ........................ 296 Vanity mirrors................... 297 Clock ................................ 298 Power outlets ................... 299 Seat heaters..................... 301 Floor mat.......................... 303

268

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Manual air conditioning system

Adjusting the settings

To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock- wise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease). Turning the dial to 0 turns off the fan.

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counterclockwise (cool).

is not pressed, the system will blow ambient temperature air

or heated air.

To select the air outlets, set the air outlet selection dial to the desired position. The positions between the air outlet selections shown below can also be selected for more delicate adjustment.

: If equipped

Fan speed control dial

Air outlet selection dial

Air conditioning on/off button

Temperature control dial

Outside air or recirculated air mode

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

269

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Defogging the windshield

Set the air outlet selection dial to position.

The air intake is automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recircu- lated air mode when the switch is on.

Perform the following operations accordingly: To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial.

To adjust the temperature setting, turn the temperature con- trol dial.

If the dehumidification function is not operating, press

to operate the dehumidification function.

To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

270

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Air outlets and air flow Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

The air intake is automatically switched to outside air mode. It is not possible to return to recircu- lated air mode when the switch is on.

271

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (introduces air from out- side the vehicle) (indicator off) and recirculated air mode (recycles air inside the vehicle) (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.

Adjusting the position of the air outlets

Center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Right and left side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

When defrosting the side win- dows, face the right and left side outlets toward them.

272

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets Open the air outlet. Close the air outlet.

Right and left side outlets Open the vent. Close the vent.

273

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

For quick cooling Turn the temperature control dial to the MAX A/C position and select the recirculated air mode.

Fogging up of the windows The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the

windshield effectively.

If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. When driving on dusty roads

Close all windows. If dust thrown up by the vehicle is still drawn into the vehi- cle after closing the windows, it is recommended that the air intake mode be set to outside air mode and the fan speed to any setting except off.

Outside/recirculated air mode Setting to the recirculated air mode temporarily is recommended in prevent- ing dirty air from entering the vehicle interior and helping to cool the vehicle when the outside air temperature is high.

When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.

Ventilation and air conditioning odors To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode. During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

To reduce potential odors from occurring: It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

Air conditioning filter P. 360

274

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

WARNING

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not set the air outlet selection dial to during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

275

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Automatic air conditioning system

: If equipped

Air outlets are automatically selected and fan speed is automatically adjusted according to the set temperature setting.

*1: For the drivers side

*2: For the front passengers side

Windshield defogger

Temperature control dial*1

Outside air or recirculated air mode

Temperature setting display*1

OffAutomatic mode Dual operation button

Changes the air outlets used

Air conditioning on/off button

Temperature control dial*2

Temperature setting display*2

Fan speed control dial

Fan speed/Air outlet display

276

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using the automatic air conditioning system

Press .

The dehumidification function begins to operate. Air outlets, fan speed and the air conditioner compressor are automati- cally adjusted according to the temperature setting. Turn temperature control dial clockwise to increase the tem- perature and turn temperature control dial counterclockwise to decrease the temperature on the drivers side.

When is pressed (the indicator on is on) or the pas-

sengers side temperature control dial is turned, the temperature for the driver and passenger seats can be adjusted separately.

Automatic mode indicator If the fan speed setting or air flow modes are operated, the auto- matic mode indicator goes off. However, automatic mode for func- tions other than that operated is maintained.

STEP 1

STEP 2

277

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Adjusting the settings manually

To adjust the fan speed, turn the fan speed control dial clock- wise (increase) or counter-clock wise (decrease).

Press to turn the fan off.

To adjust the temperature settings, turn the temperature con- trol dial clockwise (warm) or counter-clock wise (cool). To adjust the temperature control dial clockwise (warm) or counter- clockwise (cool) on the passenger side to separately adjust the tem- perature for the passenger and driver sides (dual mode).

Press (the indicator on turns off) to return the driver

and passenger side temperatures to the same setting (simultaneous mode).

The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultane-

ous modes each time is pressed.

To change the air outlets, press .

The air outlets used are switched each time either side of the button is pressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

278

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The dehumidification function operates and fan speed increases. Set the outside/recirculated air mode button to outside air mode if the recirculated air mode is used. (It may switch automati- cally.) To defog the windshield and the side windows early, turn the air flow and temperature up. To return to the previous mode,

press again when the

windshield is defogged.

279

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Air outlets and air flow

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and feet.

Air flows to the feet.

Air flows to the feet and the windshield defogger operates.

If the recirculated air mode is used, it may automatically switch to the outside air mode.

280

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Switching between outside air mode and recirculated air mode

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recircu-

lated air mode (indicator on) each time is pressed.

Adjusting the position of the air outlets

Center outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

Right and left side outlets Direct air flow to the left or right, up or down.

When defrosting the side win- dows, face the right and left side outlets toward them.

281

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Opening and closing the air outlets

Center outlets Open the air outlet. Close the air outlet.

Right and left side outlets Open the vent. Close the vent.

282

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Using automatic mode Fan speed is adjusted automatically according to the temperature setting and the ambient conditions. Therefore, the fan may stop for a while until warm or cool air is ready to flow

immediately after is pressed.

Fogging up of the windows The windows will easily fog up when the humidity in the vehicle is high.

Turning on will dehumidify the air from the outlets and defog the

windshield effectively.

If you turn off, the windows may fog up more easily.

The windows may fog up if the recirculated air mode is used. Outside/recirculated air mode

When driving on dusty roads such as tunnels or in heavy traffic, set the outside/recirculated air mode button to the recirculated air mode. This is effective in preventing outside air from entering the vehicle interior. During cooling operation, setting the recirculated air mode will also cool the vehicle interior effectively.

Outside/recirculated air mode may automatically switch depending on the temperature setting or the inside temperature.

When the outside temperature falls to nearly 32F (0C) The dehumidification function may not operate even when is pressed.

283

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

Ventilation and air conditioning odors To let fresh air in, set the air conditioning system to the outside air mode. During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause odor to be emitted from the vents.

To reduce potential odors from occurring: It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off. The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time

immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic mode.

Air conditioning filter P. 360

WARNING

To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the wind- shield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking your vision.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

284

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

The rear window defogger is used to defog the rear window. The out- side rear view mirror defoggers* are used to remove frost, dew or raindrops from the outside rear view mirrors.

Vehicles with a manual air conditioning system On/off

The defoggers will automati- cally turn off after approxi- mately 15 minutes.

Vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system On/off

The defoggers will automati- cally turn off after approxi- mately 15 minutes.

*: Vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers

285

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

3

Interior features

The defoggers can be operated when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

The outside rear view mirror defoggers (vehicles with outside rear view mirror defoggers) Turning the rear window defogger on will turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on.

When continuous operation is set (vehicles with an automatic air con- ditioning system) During continuous operation, the defogger stops operating for 2 minutes after every 15 minutes of continual operation. Even during the 2 minutes that operation stops, the operating light remains illuminated. The rear window defogger will continue to operate in this cycle until it is turned off.

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer (vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system) The rear window defogger can be set to 15-minute operation or continuous operation. (Customizable features P. 487)

WARNING

When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on (vehicles with out- side rear view mirror defoggers) Do not touch the outside surface of the rear view mirrors, as they can become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge Do not leave the rear window defogger on longer than necessary when the engine is stopped.

286

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the AUX/USB port

Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system The volume and sound quality can be adjusted using the vehicles audio controls. All other adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet Noise may occur during playback. Use the battery power source of the por- table audio device to reduce noise.

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen to it through the vehicles speakers. Depending on the type of portable audio device, some device opera- tion may not be available.

Open the cover and connect the portable audio device.

287

3-2. Using the audio system

3

Interior features

Steering wheel audio switches

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an accident, exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navi- gation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.

288

3-2. Using the audio system

Using the microphone

The microphone can be used for the voice command in the Bluetooth audio system or the hands-free phone system.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navi- gation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the audio system or navigation system.

289

3

Interior features

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Interior light (P. 290) Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart key system) ENGINE START STOP switch light (vehicles with a smart key system)

290

3-3. Using the interior lights

Interior light

Turns the light off Turns the door position on Turns the light on

Illuminated entry system Vehicles without a smart key system The lights automatically turn on/off according to the engine switch position, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/ closed. Vehicles with a smart key system The lights automatically turn on/off according to ENGINE START STOP switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

To prevent battery discharge If the following lights remain on when the door is not fully closed, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes: Interior light (when the switch is in the DOOR position) Engine switch light (vehicles without a smart key system) ENGINE START STOP switch light (vehicles with a smart key system)

Customization that can be configured at Toyota dealer Settings (e.g. the time elapsed before lights turn off) can be changed. (Customizable features P. 487)

Interior light

291

3

Interior features

3-4. Using the storage features

List of storage features

WARNING

Items that should not be left in the storage spaces Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high: Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact

with other stored items. Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas, causing a fire hazard.

Glove box Bottle holders Cup holders/console tray

292

3-4. Using the storage features

Glove box

Pull up the lever to open the glove box.

WARNING

Caution while driving Keep the glove box closed. In the event of sudden braking or sudden swerv- ing, an accident may occur due to an occupant being struck by the open glove box or the items stored inside.

Glove box

293

3-4. Using the storage features

3

Interior features

Bottle holders

When using the bottle holder When storing a bottle, close the cap. The bottle may not be stored depending on its size or shape.

WARNING

Items unsuitable for the bottle holder Do not place anything other than a pet bottle in the bottle holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking and cause injury.

NOTICE

Items unsuitable for the bottle holder Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot- tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may spill and glasses may break.

Bottle holders

294

3-4. Using the storage features

Cup holders/console tray

Changing the cup holder position

Changing the console tray size

Remove the cup holder and change the holder position.

Remove the cup holder.

Cup holders/console tray

295

3-4. Using the storage features

3

Interior features

WARNING

Caution while driving Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Before driving, place the cup holder in the rear position so that it does not

hinder shift lever operation.

Items unsuitable for the cup holder Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders. Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or sudden braking, causing injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent burns.

When placing the cup holder, make sure it is facing the correct direction. Failure to do so will cause the cup holder to not be secure in the console tray and hinder shift lever operation.

Cup holders/console tray

296

3-5. Other interior features

Sun visors

To set the visor in the for- ward position, flip it down. To set the visor in the side position, flip down, unhook, and swing it to the side.

297

3-5. Other interior features

3

Interior features

Vanity mirrors

Open the cover to use.

298

3-5. Other interior features

Clock

The clock is displayed when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals The clock data will be reset.

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

Adjusts the hours Adjusts the minutes Rounds to the nearest hour* *: e.g.1:00 to 1:29 1:00

1:30 to 1:59 2:00 00

299

3-5. Other interior features

3

Interior features

Power outlets

The power outlet can be used for 12 V accessories that run on 10 A or less.

In the console tray

In the glove box

300

3-5. Other interior features

The power outlet can be used when Vehicles without a smart key system The engine switch is in the ACC or ON position. Vehicles with a smart key system The ENGINE START STOP switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

When turning the engine switch off Disconnect electrical devices with charging functions, such as mobile battery packs. If such devices are left connected, the engine switch may not be turned off normally.

NOTICE

To avoid damaging the power outlet Close the power outlet lid when the power outlet is not in use. Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir- cuit.

To prevent the fuse from being blown Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V 10 A.

To prevent battery discharge Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not running.

301

3-5. Other interior features

3

Interior features

Seat heaters

The seat heaters can be used when The ENGINE START STOP switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

When not in use Turn the seat heater off. The indicator light goes off.

Press the switch to warm the seats.

The indicator light comes on when a seat heater is turned on.

Rapid heating Normal heating

: If equipped

302

3-5. Other interior features

WARNING

Burns Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns: Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-

lenged Persons with sensitive skin Persons who are fatigued Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.) Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature of the seat and may lead to overheating.

Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

To prevent seat heater damage Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

To prevent battery discharge Turn the seat heaters off when the engine is not running.

303

3-5. Other interior features

3

Interior features

Floor mat

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place onto the carpet.

Front Drivers seat floor mat Front passengers seat floor mat Retaining hook (clip) eye- lets

Rear Rear seat floor mats

Installing the floor mats (front) Insert the retaining hooks (clips) into the floor mat eye- lets.

Turn the upper knob of each retaining hook (clip) to secure the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

STEP 2

*

304

3-5. Other interior features

WARNING

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may cause the driver's floor mat to slip, possibly interfering with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may become difficult to stop the vehicle. This could lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury. When installing a floor mat

Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

Drivers seat floor mat: Only use floor mats designed for the driver's seat. Front: Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips)

provided. Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other. Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

Before driving

Front: Check that the floor mat is securely fixed in the correct place with all the provided retaining hooks (clips). Be especially careful to perform this check after cleaning the floor.

Drivers seat: With the engine stopped and the shift lever in P (automatic trans- mission) or N (manual transmission), fully depress each pedal to the floor to make sure it does not interfere with the floor mat.

305

3-5. Other interior features

3

Interior features

NOTICE

When installing a rear floor mat

Make sure that the rear floor mats are installed in the correct position. If a floor mat is positioned incorrectly, it may inter- fere with the seat rail or other parts when a front seat is moved forward or back- ward, damaging the vehicle or floor mat.

306

3-5. Other interior features

Maintenance and care 4

307

4-1. Maintenance and care Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior......... 308 Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior.......... 312 Cleaning and protecting

the Alcantara area ....... 316

4-2. Maintenance Maintenance

requirements.................. 318 General maintenance....... 320 Emission inspection and

maintenance (I/M) programs........................ 323

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions .................... 324

Hood ................................ 327 Positioning a floor jack ..... 329 Engine compartment........ 331 Tires ................................. 345 Tire inflation pressure ...... 353 Wheels ............................. 357 Air conditioning filter......... 360 Wireless remote control/

electronic key battery..... 363 Checking and replacing

fuses .............................. 367 Light bulbs........................ 375

308

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

Automatic car washes Fold the mirrors before washing the vehicle. Start washing from the front

of the vehicle. Make sure to extend the mirrors before driving. Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface

and harm your vehicles paint. High pressure car washes

As water may enter the cabin, do not bring the nozzle tip near the gaps around the doors or perimeter of the windows, or spray these areas continu- ously.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime condition.

Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a chamois.

For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor- oughly with water.

Wipe away any water.

Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle body is cool.

309

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M aintenance and care

Aluminum wheels Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Wash detergent off with water immediately after use. To protect the paint from damage, make sure to observe the following

precautions. Do not use acidic, alkaline or abrasive detergent Do not use hard brushes Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, such as after

driving or parking in hot weather Brake (vehicles with brembo brake)

Painted brake calipers When using detergent, use neutral detergent. Do not use hard brushes

or abrasive cleaners, as they will damage the paint. Do not use detergent on the brake calipers when they are hot. Wash detergent off immediately after use.

Rust may form if the vehicle is parked with wet brake pads or disc rotors, causing them to stick. Before parking the vehicle after it is washed, drive slowly and apply the brakes several times to dry the parts.

Parts containing resin such as the bumper Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

Plated portions If dirt cannot be removed, clean the parts as follows: Use a soft cloth dampened with an approximately 5% solution of neutral

detergent and water to clean the dirt off. Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remaining moisture. To remove oily deposits, use alcohol wet wipes or a similar product.

310

4-1. Maintenance and care

WARNING

When washing the vehicle Do not apply water to the inside of the engine compartment. Doing so may cause the electrical components etc. to catch fire.

Precautions regarding the exhaust pipes Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers to become quite hot. When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipes and diffusers until they have cooled sufficiently, as touching hot exhaust pipes and rear bumper diffusers can cause burns.

NOTICE

To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo- nents (aluminum wheels etc.) Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

After driving near the sea coast After driving on salted roads If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface If you see dead insects, insect droppings or bird droppings on the paint After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,

iron powder or chemical substances If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately. To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the wheels. Protective film for side sill plates

Make sure to remove the protective film. Failure to do so may cause rust, depending on conditions.

311

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M aintenance and care

NOTICE

Cleaning the exterior lights Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights. Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses. To prevent damage to the windshield wiper arms

When lifting the wiper arms away from the windshield, pull the driver side wiper arm upward first, and repeat for the passenger side. When returning the wipers to their original position, do so from the passenger side first.

When using a high pressure car wash Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or resin manufactured

cover), connectors or the following parts. The parts may be damaged if they come into contact with high-pressure water. Traction related parts Steering parts Suspension parts Brake parts

Keep the cleaning nozzle at least 11.9 in. (30 cm) away from the vehicles body. Otherwise resin section, such as moldings and bumpers, may be deformed and damaged. Also, do not continuously hold the nozzle in the same place.

Do not spray the lower part of the windshield continuously. If water enters the air conditioning system intake located near the lower part of the windshield, the air conditioning system may not operate cor- rectly.

312

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle's interior and keep it in top condition:

Protecting the vehicle interior Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-

faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

If dirt cannot be removed, wipe it off with a soft cloth damp- ened with neural detergent diluted to approximately 1%. Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

Cleaning the leather areas Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5% neutral wool detergent.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain- ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated area.

Cleaning the synthetic leather areas Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

Wipe it off with a soft cloth dampened with neutral detergent diluted to approximately 1%.

Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly wipe off remaining traces of detergent and water.

313

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M aintenance and care

Caring for leather areas Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year to maintain the quality of the vehicles interior.

Shampooing the carpets There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi- ble.

Seat belts Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

WARNING

Water in the vehicle Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch fire.

Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet. (P. 94) Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function properly, resulting in death or severe injury.

Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel) Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off the windshield, obstructing the driver's view and leading to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

314

4-1. Maintenance and care

NOTICE

Cleaning detergents Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or

alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel's or other interior parts painted surface may be damaged.

Do not use a chemical agent containing silicone (highly-polymerized sili- con compound) when cleaning any of the electrical appliances such as the air conditioning, all switches and their surrounding areas. If silicon (highly-polymerized silicon compound) contacts these compo- nents, it may cause the electrical appliances to malfunction.

Preventing damage to leather surfaces Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of leather surfaces. Remove any dust, dirt, sand, oil spots etc. on leather surfaces immedi-

ately. Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer. Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-

stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats up significantly.

Water on the floor Do not wash the vehicle floor with water. Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and may also cause the body to rust.

315

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M aintenance and care

NOTICE

Cleaning the inside of the rear window Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires. Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear window, as this may cause

damage to the rear window defogger heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the heater wires.

When cleaning the instrument panel When small grains of sand and so forth have gotten into instrument panels surface and cannot be wiped away using a cloth, use a clay bar without add- ing water. Forcibly trying to wipe the surface clean with a brush or sponge may scratch the surface or fragments of the cloth may be left in the surface.

316

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the Alcantara area

: If equipped

The following procedures will protect and keep your vehicles Alcantara upholstery in top condition:

Day-to-day cleaning Perform the following procedures regularly (approximately once a month).

Wipe the entire Alcantara area with a soft cloth that has been dampened with lukewarm water (approximately 104F [40C]) and squeezed out. Do not wipe too hard. Doing so may make the Alcantara uphol- stery surface become uneven. Also, only use a clean cloth.

Once dry, brush the area with a soft brush.

Liquid stains If liquid is spilled, lightly pat the area with a tissue paper or

similar to soak up the liquid.

When mud, coffee, etc., has dried on the Alcantara uphol- stery, remove it by lightly brushing the area with a soft brush or similar.

We recommend using a vacuum cleaner to clean up the area after the above has been performed.

When a stain cannot be removed using the above procedures, remove it by performing the following:

Lightly wipe the stained area from the outside to the inside from multiple angles with a soft cloth that has been damp- ened with lukewarm water (approximately 104F [40C]) and squeezed out. Do not wipe the area so strongly that it causes the Alcantara

upholstery surface to become uneven. Also, prepare a clean cloth, and always use a clean area of the cloth.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

317

4-1. Maintenance and care

4

M aintenance and care

When removing dirt or dust from the Alcantara areas Remove dirt or dust from the Alcantara areas by lighting brushing with a soft brush. If this does not remove the dirt or dust, remove it using adhesive tape.

NOTICE

When soaking up spilled liquids Do not press down too firmly with the cloth, tissue paper etc., as doing so may cause the liquid to further penetrate the material, making soaking up the liquid more difficult.

If the Alcantara upholstery surface becomes uneven, lightly brush it with a soft brush. Allow the surface to dry completely.

Oil stains You will need the following items:

A cloth that has been dampened with benzene

A dry cloth

Using a dry cloth or tissue paper, wipe away as much of the oil as possible to prevent the stained area from expanding. After patting the area from the outside to the inside from multiple angles using the cloth dampened with benzene, soak up the oil and benzene that floats up by patting the area with a dry cloth. If the Alcantara upholstery surface becomes uneven, lightly brush it with a soft brush.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

318

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

Repair and replacement It is recommended that genuine Toyota parts be used for repair to ensure performance of each system. If non-Toyota parts are used in replacement or if a repair shop other than a Toyota dealer performs repairs, confirm the war- ranty coverage.

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular maintenance is essential. It is the owners responsibility to perform regular checks. Toyota recommends the following maintenance.

General maintenance Should be performed on a daily basis. This can be done by your- self or by a Toyota dealer.

Scheduled maintenance Should be performed at specified intervals according to the maintenance schedule.

For details about maintenance items and schedules, refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.

Do-it-yourself maintenance You can perform some maintenance procedures yourself. Please be aware that do-it-yourself maintenance may affect war- ranty coverage.

The use of Toyota Repair Manuals is recommended.

For details about warranty coverage, see the separate Owners War- ranty Information Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement.

319

4-2. Maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Allow inspection and repairs to be performed by a Toyota dealer Toyota technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up to date

with the latest service information. They are well informed about the operations of all systems on your vehicle.

Keep a copy of the repair order. It proves that the maintenance that has been performed is under warranty coverage. If any problem should arise while your vehicle is under warranty, your Toyota dealer will promptly take care of it.

WARNING

If your vehicle is not properly maintained It could result in serious damage to the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.

Warning in handling of battery Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and a wide variety of automobile

components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and other reproductive harm. Work in a well ventilated area.

Oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as well as waste produced by component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor- nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Avoid exposure and wash any affected area immediately.

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after handling. (P. 339)

320

4-2. Maintenance

General maintenance

Engine compartment

Items Check points

Battery Check the connections. (P. 339)

Brake fluid At the correct level? (P. 337)

Engine coolant At the correct level? (P. 335)

Engine oil At the correct level? (P. 332)

Exhaust system No fumes or strange sounds?

Radiator/condenser/hoses Not blocked with foreign matter? (P. 337)

Washer fluid At the correct level? (P. 343)

Listed below are the general maintenance items that should be per- formed at the intervals specified in the Owner's Warranty Informa- tion Booklet or Owners Manual Supplement/Scheduled Maintenance Guide. It is recommended that any problem you notice should be brought to the attention of your Toyota dealer or qualified service shop for advice.

321

4-2. Maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Vehicle interior

Items Check points

Accelerator pedal Moves smoothly (without uneven pedal effort or catching)?

Automatic transmission Park mechanism

Can the vehicle be held securely on an incline with the shift lever in P?

Brake pedal

Moves smoothly? Does it have appropriate clear-

ance and correct amount of free play?

Brakes

Not pull to one side when applied?

Loss of brake effectiveness? Spongy feeling brake pedal? Pedal almost touches floor?

Clutch pedal Moves smoothly?

Head restraints Move smoothly and lock securely?

Indicators/buzzers Function properly?

Lights Do all the lights come on?

Parking brake Moves smoothly? Can hold the vehicle securely on

an incline?

Seat belts Does the seat belt system oper-

ate smoothly? Are the belts undamaged?

Seats Do the seat controls operate properly?

Steering wheel Moves smoothly? Has correct free play? No strange noises?

322

4-2. Maintenance

Vehicle exterior

Items Check points

Door/trunk Operate smoothly?

Engine hood The lock system works properly?

Fluid leaks Is there any leakage after park- ing?

Tire

Inflation pressure is correct? Tire surfaces not worn or dam-

aged? Tires rotated according to the

maintenance schedule? Wheel nuts are not loose?

Windshield wipers

The wiper blades should not show any signs of cracking, splitting, wear, contamination or deforma- tion.

The wiper blades should clear the windshield without streaking or skipping.

WARNING

If the engine is running Turn the engine off and ensure that there is adequate ventilation before per- forming maintenance checks.

323

4-2. Maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Emission inspection and maintenance (I/M) programs

Some states have vehicle emission inspection programs which include OBD (On Board Diagnostics) checks. The OBD system moni- tors the operation of the emission control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on The OBD system determines that a problem exists somewhere in the emission control system. Your vehicle may not pass the I/ M test and may need to be repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to service the vehicle.

Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test: When the battery is disconnected or discharged

Readiness codes that are set during ordinary driving are erased. Also, depending on your driving habits, the readiness codes may not be completely set.

When the fuel tank cap is loose

The malfunction indicator lamp comes on as a temporary mal- function and your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

When the malfunction indicator lamp goes off after several driving trips The error code in the OBD system will not be cleared unless the vehicle is driven 40 or more times.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test Contact your Toyota dealer to prepare the vehicle for re-testing.

324

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct procedure as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (P. 339)

Warm water Baking soda Grease Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts) Distilled water

Brake fluid level (P. 337)

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid

Rag or paper towel Funnel (used only for adding

brake fluid)

Engine coolant level (P. 335)

TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre- mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non- silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite and non-borate coolant with long- life hybrid organic acid technology. TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre- mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE is pre-mixed with 50% coolant and 50% deionized water.

Funnel (used only for adding engine coolant)

Engine oil level (P. 332)

Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent

Rag or paper towel, funnel (used only for adding engine oil)

325

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Items Parts and tools

Fuses (P. 367) Fuse with same amperage rating as original

Light bulbs (P. 375)

Bulb with same number and watt- age rating as original

Phillips-head screwdriver Flathead screwdriver

Radiator and condenser (P. 337)

Tire inflation pressure (P. 353) Tire pressure gauge Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 343) Water washer fluid containing

antifreeze (for winter use) Funnel

326

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death or serious injury, observe the following precautions. When working on the engine compartment

Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from the moving fan and engine drive belt.

Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the engine compartment.

Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat- tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

When working near the electric cooling fans or radiator grille Vehicles without a smart key system: Be sure the engine switch is off. With the engine switch in the ON position, the electric cooling fans may auto- matically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or the coolant tempera- ture is high. (P. 337) Vehicles with a smart key system: Be sure the ENGINE START STOP switch is off. With the ENGINE START STOP switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric cooling fans may automatically start to run if the air condi- tioning is on and/or the coolant temperature is high. (P. 337)

Safety glasses Wear safety glasses to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from getting in the eyes.

NOTICE

If you remove the air cleaner filter Driving with the air cleaner filter removed may cause excessive engine wear due to dirt in the air.

327

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Hood

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Push the auxiliary catch lever to the left and lift the hood.

Hold the hood open by insert- ing the supporting rod into the slot.

When holding the supporting rod, hold it by the grip portion.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

Grip

328

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

Pre-driving check Check that the hood is fully closed and locked. If the hood is not locked properly it may open while the vehicle is in motion and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

When opening the hood Do not lift up or operate the wipers. Doing so may cause the hood and wip-

ers to contact, scratching the hood. Use caution when opening the hood in windy weather as it may close sud-

denly in strong wind. Do not attach any accessories other than genuine Toyota products to the

hood. Such additional weight on the hood may cause it to be too heavy to be supported by the supporting rod when opened.

When closing the hood Do not apply excessive weight or force when closing the hood as doing so may result in damage.

329

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Positioning a floor jack

When raising your vehicle with a floor jack, position the jack cor- rectly. Improper placement may damage your vehicle or cause injury.

Front

Rear

330

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

When raising your vehicle Make sure to observe the following precautions to reduce the possibility of death or serious injury:

When using a floor jack, follow the instructions of the manual provided with the jack.

Do not use the jack that was supplied with your vehicle. Do not put any part of your body underneath the vehicle when it is sup-

ported only by the floor jack. Always use floor jack and/or automotive jack stands on a solid, flat, level

surface. Do not start the engine while the vehicle is supported by the floor jack. Stop the vehicle on level, firm ground, firmly set the parking brake and shift

the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or R (vehicles with a manual transmission).

Make sure to set the floor jack properly at the jack point. Raising the vehicle with an improperly positioned floor jack will damage the vehicle and may cause the vehicle to fall off the floor jack.

Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in the vehicle. When raising the vehicle, do not place any object on top of or underneath

the floor jack. When raising the vehicle, ensure that there is sufficient surrounding space.

The vehicles position may change slightly when lowered.

Lift up the vehicle using a floor jack such as the one shown in the illustra- tion.

331

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Engine compartment

Battery (P. 339) Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 332) Brake fluid reservoir

(P. 337) Engine oil filler cap

(P. 333)

Washer fluid tank (P. 343)

Electric cooling fans Condenser (P. 337) Radiator (P. 337) Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 335) Fuse box (P. 367)

332

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil level on the dipstick.

Checking the engine oil Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine and turning it off, wait more than five minutes for the oil to drain back into the bottom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean. Reinsert the dipstick fully. Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check the oil level. When checking the oil, look at both sides of the dipstick and use the lower measurement to determine the level of oil.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

Low Full

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

333

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Adding engine oil If the oil level is below or near the low level mark, add engine oil of the same type as already in the engine.

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before adding oil.

Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counterclockwise. Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick. Install the oil filler cap by turning it clockwise.

Engine oil selection P. 462

Oil quantity (Low Full) 1.1 qt. (1.0 L, 0.9 Imp. qt.)

Items Clean funnel

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

334

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Engine oil consumption A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the follow- ing situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be refilled in between oil maintenance intervals. When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle

or after replacing the engine If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, or when driving

while accelerating or decelerating frequently When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently

through heavy traffic

WARNING

Used engine oil Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the ground. Call your Toyota dealer, service station or auto parts store for information concerning recycling or disposal.

Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

335

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Engine coolant

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap FULL LOW

If the level is on or below the LOW line, add coolant up to the FULL line.

NOTICE

To prevent serious engine damage Check the oil level on a regular basis.

When replacing the engine oil Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components. Avoid overfilling, or the engine could be damaged. Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle. Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing Visually check the radiator, hoses, engine coolant filler cap, radiator cap, drain cock and water pump. If you cannot find a leak, have your Toyota dealer pressure test the cap and check for leaks in the cooling system.

336

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Coolant selection Only use TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE or similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol- ogy. TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long Life Coolant BLUE is a mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deionized water. (Enabled: -31F [-35C]) For more details about engine coolant, contact your Toyota dealer.

WARNING

When the engine is hot Do not remove the radiator cap. The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

When adding engine coolant Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

If you spill coolant Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent it from damaging parts or paint.

337

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Radiator and condenser

Check the radiator and condenser and clear away any foreign objects. If either of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of their condition, have your vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

Brake fluid

Checking fluid level The brake fluid level should be between the MAX and MIN lines on the tank.

MAX MIN

WARNING

When the engine is hot Do not touch the radiator or condenser as they may be hot and cause seri- ous injuries, such as burns.

338

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Adding fluid Make sure to check the fluid type and prepare the necessary items.

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

Items Clean funnel

Brake fluid can absorb moisture from the air Excess moisture in the fluid can cause a dangerous loss of braking effi- ciency. Use only newly opened brake fluid.

WARNING

When filling the reservoir Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage painted surfaces. If fluid gets in your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water immediately. If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

NOTICE

If the fluid level is low or high It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high. If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

339

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

Battery exterior Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Hold-down clamp Terminals

Checking battery fluid Check that the level is between UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.

UPPER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL

If the fluid level is at or below LOWER LEVEL, add distilled water.

340

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Adding distilled water

Remove the vent plug. Add distilled water. If the UPPER LEVEL line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking directly at the cell.

Put the vent plug back on and close securely.

Low O.K.

Before recharging When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Therefore, before recharging: If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable. Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and

disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

341

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

After recharging/reconnecting the battery (vehicles with a smart key system) Unlocking the doors using the smart key system may not be possible

immediately after reconnecting the battery. If this happens, use the wire- less remote control or the mechanical key to lock/unlock the doors.

Start the engine with the ENGINE START STOP switch in ACCES- SORY mode. The engine may not start with the ENGINE START STOP switch turned off. However, the engine will operate normally from the sec- ond attempt.

The ENGINE START STOP switch mode is recorded by the vehicle. If the battery is reconnected, the vehicle will return the ENGINE START STOP switch mode to the status it was in before the battery was discon- nected. Make sure to turn off the engine before disconnect the battery. Take extra care when connecting the battery if the ENGINE START STOP switch mode prior to discharge is unknown.

If the engine will not start even after multiple attempts, contact your Toyota dealer.

342

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

Chemicals in the battery A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near the battery: Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools. Do not smoke or light a match near the battery. Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes. Never inhale or swallow electrolyte. Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery. Keep children away from the battery.

Where to safely charge the battery Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

Emergency measures regarding electrolyte If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi- ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

If electrolyte gets on your skin Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical attention immediately.

If electrolyte gets on your clothes It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth- ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

If you accidentally swallow electrolyte Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention immediately.

343

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Washer fluid

If the washer fluid level is at LOW, add washer fluid.

NOTICE

When recharging the battery Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all accessories are turned off.

When adding distilled water Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro- sion.

Using the gauge

The washer fluid level can be checked by observing the position of the level on the liquid-covered holes in the gauge. If the level falls below the second hole from the bottom (the LOW position), refill the washer fluid.

CTH43AS134

Current fluid level

344

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

When adding washer fluid Do not add washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

NOTICE

Washer fluid Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid. Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicles painted surfaces, as well as damaging the pump leading to problems of the washer fluid not spraying.

Diluting washer fluid Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary. Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot- tle.

345

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Tires

Replace or rotate tires in accordance with maintenance sched- ules and treadwear.

Checking tires Check if the treadwear indicators are showing on the tires. Also check the tires for uneven wear, such as excessive wear on one side of the tread.

Check the spare tire condition and pressure if not rotated.

New tread Worn tread Treadwear indicator

The location of treadwear indicators is shown by a TWI or mark, etc., molded into the sidewall of each tire. Replace the tires if the treadwear indicators are showing on a tire.

Tire rotation Rotate the tires in the order shown.

To equalize tire wear and extend tire life, Toyota recom- mends that tire rotation is carried out at the same inter- val as tire inspection.

Front

346

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Installing tire pressure warning valves and transmitters

When replacing tires or wheels, tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must also be installed.

When new tire pressure warning valves and transmitters are installed, new tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes must be registered in the tire pressure warning computer and tire pressure warning system must be initialized. Have tire pressure warning valve and transmitter ID codes registered by your Toyota dealer. (P. 346)

Registering ID codes

The tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is equipped with a unique ID code. When replacing a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, it is necessary to register the ID code. Have the ID code registered by your Toyota dealer.

The tire pressure warning system Your Toyota is equipped with a tire pressure warning system that uses tire pressure warning valves and transmitters to detect low tire inflation pressure before serious problems arise. (P. 400)

347

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

When to replace your vehicles tires Tires should be replaced if: The treadwear indicators are showing on a tire. You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the

size or location of a cut or other damage If you are not sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

Replacing tires and wheels If the ID code of the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter is not registered, the tire pressure warning system will not work properly. After driving for about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warning light comes on after blinking for 1 minute to indicate a system malfunction.

Tire life Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

If the tread wears down below 0.16 in. (4 mm) on snow tires The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

Low profile tires Generally, low profile tires will wear more rapidly and tire grip perfor- mance will be reduced on snowy and/or icy roads when compared to standard tires. Be sure to use snow tires or tire chains on snowy and/or icy roads and drive carefully at a speed appropriate for road and weather conditions.

348

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maximum load of tire Check that the maximum load of the replacement tire is greater than 1/2 of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR) of either the front axle or the rear axle, whichever is greater.

Tire types 1 Summer tires

Summer tires are high-speed performance tires best suited to highway driving under dry conditions. Since summer tires do not have the same traction performance as snow tires, summer tires are inadequate for driving on snow-covered or icy roads. For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, the use of snow tires is recommended. When installing snow tires, be sure to replace all four tires.

2 All season tires All season tires are designed to provide better traction in snow and to be adequate for driving in most winter conditions, as well as for use year round. All season tires, however, do not have adequate traction performance compared with snow tires in heavy or loose snow. Also, all season tires fall short in acceleration and handling performance compared with summer tires in highway driving.

3 Snow tires For driving on snow-covered roads or icy roads, we recommend using snow tires. If you need snow tires, select tires of the same size, con- struction and load capacity as the originally installed tires. Since your vehicle has radial tires as original equipment, make sure your snow tires also have radial construction. Do not install studded tires without first checking local regulations for possible restriction. Snow tires should be installed on all wheels. (P. 261)

For the GAWR, see the Certification Label. For the maximum load of the tire, see the load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure mentioned on the sidewall of the tire. (P. 474)

349

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Initializing the tire pressure warning system Initialize the system with the tire inflation pressure adjusted to the speci- fied level.

Routine tire inflation pressure checks The tire pressure warning system does not replace routine tire inflation pressure checks. Make sure to check tire inflation pressure as part of your routine of daily vehicle checks.

Tire pressure warning system certification (vehicles without a smart key system) For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. MODEL/FCC IDs:

Transmitter: PAXPMVC010 Receiver: HYQ23AAC

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi- ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip- ment. For vehicles sold in Canada Model: PMV-C010 NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applica- bles aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compro- mettre le fonctionnement.

350

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire pressure warning system certification (vehicles with a smart key system) For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. MODEL/FCC IDs:

Transmitter: PAXPMVC010 Receiver: HYQ23AAE

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. FCC WARNING: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsi- ble for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equip- ment. For vehicles sold in Canada Model: PMV-C010 NOTE: This device complies with Industry Canadas licence-exempt RSSs. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause interference; and (2) This device must accept any interfer- ence, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. NOTE: Le prsent appareil est conforme aux CNR dIndustrie Canada applica- bles aux appareils radio exempts de licence. Lexploitation est autorise aux deux conditions suivantes: (1) lappareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage; (2) lutilisateur de lappareil doit accepter tout brouillage radiolectrique subi, mme si le brouillage est susceptible den compro- mettre le fonctionnement.

351

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

WARNING

Tire pressure warning system operation The tire pressure warning system may not provide warning immediately if a tire bursts or if sudden air leakage occurs.

When inspecting or replacing tires Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents. Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury. Make sure to install 4 tires that are of the specified size, and that all 4

tires are the same size, same maker, same brand and tread pattern. Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota. Only use radial tires. Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires. Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

NOTICE

Repairing or replacing tires, wheels, tire pressure warning valves, transmitters and tire valve caps When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning

valves and transmitters, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pres- sure warning valves and transmitters may be damaged if not handled correctly.

Make sure to install the tire valve caps. If the tire valve caps are not installed, water could enter the tire pressure warning valves and the tire pressure warning valves could be bound.

When replacing tire valve caps, do not use tire valve caps other than those specified. The cap may become stuck.

352

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

Driving on rough roads Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes. These conditions may cause losses in tire inflation pressure, reducing the cushioning ability of the tires. In addition, driving on rough roads may cause damage to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicles wheels and body.

Low profile tires and wheels Low profile tires may cause greater damage than usual to the tire wheel when receiving impact from the road surface. Therefore pay attention to the following: Be sure to use proper tire inflation pressure. If tires are under-inflated,

they may be damaged more severely. Avoid pot holes, uneven pavement, curbs and other road hazards.

Failure to do so may lead to severe tire and wheel damage. If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined. Replacing a flat tire

Do not hit and bend the disc rotor backing plate when removing and installing the tire. A bent backing plate may scrape against the disc rotor and cause noise while the vehicle is in motion.

353

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure The recommended cold tire inflation pressure and tire size is dis- played on the tire and loading information label. (P. 468)

354

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Tire inflation pressure check interval You should check tire inflation pressure every two weeks, or at least once a month. Do not forget to check the spare.

Inspection and adjustment procedure Tire valve Tire pressure gauge

Remove the tire valve cap. Press the tip of the tire pressure gauge onto the tire valve. Read the pressure using the graduations of the gauge. If the tire inflation pressure is not within the recommended levels, adjust the pressure. If you add too much air, press the center of the valve to lower. After completing the tire inflation pressure measurement and adjustment, apply soapy water to the valve and check for leakage. Reinstall the tire valve cap.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

355

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following: Reduced fuel economy Reduced driving comfort and poor handling Reduced tire life due to wear Reduced safety Damage to the drive train If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by your Toyota dealer.

Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following: Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been driven for more than 1 mile or 1.5 km, you will get an accurate cold tire inflation pressure reading.

Always use a tire pressure gauge. It is difficult to judge if a tire is properly inflated based only on its appearance.

It is normal for the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving as heat is generated in the tire. Do not reduce tire inflation pressure after driving.

Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight. Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is balanced.

356

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

WARNING

Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance Keep your tires properly inflated. If the tires are not properly inflated, the following conditions may occur which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury: Excessive wear Uneven wear Poor handling Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires Air leaking from between tire and wheel Wheel deformation and/or tire damage Greater possibility of tire damage while driving (due to road hazards,

expansion joints, sharp edges in the road, etc.)

NOTICE

When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps. If a valve cap is not installed, dirt or moisture may get into the valve and cause an air leak, resulting in decreased tire inflation pressure.

357

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced. Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of handling control.

Wheel selection When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter, rim width, and inset*. Replacement wheels are available at your Toyota dealer.

*: Conventionally referred to as offset.

Toyota does not recommend using:

Wheels of different sizes or types

Used wheels

Bent wheels that have been straightened

Aluminum wheel precautions Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use

with your aluminum wheels.

When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1000 miles (1600 km).

Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using tire chains.

Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

358

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

When replacing wheels The wheels of your Toyota are equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmitters that allow the tire pressure warning system to provide advanced warning in the event of a loss in tire inflation pressure. Whenever wheels are replaced, the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters must be installed. (P. 346)

WARNING

When replacing wheels Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in

the Owners Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control. Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a

tubeless tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing death or seri- ous injury.

When installing the wheel nuts

Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts. Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened, leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an accident and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Be sure to install the wheel nuts with the tapered ends facing inward. Installing the nuts with the tapered ends facing outward can cause the wheel to break and eventually cause the wheel to come off while driving, which could lead to an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

Tapered portion

359

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

NOTICE

Replacing tire inflation pressure warning valves and transmitters Because tire repair or replacement may affect the tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters, make sure to have tires serviced by your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop. In addition, make sure to purchase your tire pressure warning valves and transmitters at your Toyota dealer.

Ensure that only genuine Toyota wheels are used on your vehicle. Tire pressure warning valves and transmitters may not work properly with non-genuine wheels.

360

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be changed regularly to maintain air conditioning efficiency.

Removal method Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch off. Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off.

Open the glove box. Slide off the damper.

Push in each side of the glove box and pull the glove box toward you to disconnect the claws.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

361

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Lower the glove box slowly until surface is horizontal with the floor, then pull it out. (Simply pulling with gentle force will disengage the lower claws.)

Lower claw Lower claw engagement point

Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower claw engagement points may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or close the glove box.

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the air conditioning filter and replace it with a new one.

The UP marks shown on the filter should be pointing up.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

362

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Checking interval Inspect and replace the air conditioning filter according to the maintenance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, early replacement may be required. (For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the Scheduled Maintenance Guide or Owners Manual Supplement.)

If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

When removing the glove box Do not forcibly pull the glove box. Otherwise, the lower claws or the lower claw engagement points may be deformed, making it difficult to reinstall or close the glove box.

When using the air conditioning system Make sure that a filter is always installed. Using the air conditioning system without a filter may cause damage to the system.

363

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Wireless remote control/electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is depleted.

You will need the following items: Flathead screwdriver

Lithium battery CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key sys- tem), or CR2032 (vehicles with a smart key system)

Replacing the battery (vehicles without a smart key system) Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

To prevent the buttons from being disassembled, face the button surface downward.

Remove the module.

Open the case cover using a coin protected with tape etc. and remove the depleted bat- tery.

Insert a new battery with the + terminal facing up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

364

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing the battery (vehicles with a smart key system) Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

To prevent damage to the key, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the + terminal facing up.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

365

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Use a CR2016 (vehicles without a smart key system) or CR2032 (vehi- cles with a smart key system) lithium battery Batteries can be purchased at your Toyota dealer, local electrical appli-

ance shops or camera stores. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the

manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to local laws.

If the key battery is depleted The following symptoms may occur: The smart key system (if equipped) and wireless remote control will not

function properly. The operational range will be reduced.

When putting the module back (vehicles without a smart key system)

WARNING

Removed battery and other parts These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking. Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury.

Insert the module from directly above. Inserting it on an angle may prevent the key buttons from operating properly.

366

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

NOTICE

For normal operation after replacing the battery Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents: Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust. Do not touch or move any other component inside the remote control. Do not bend either of the battery terminals.

367

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch off. Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off. Open the fuse box cover.

Engine compartment Push the tabs in and lift the lid off.

Instrument panel Remove the lid.

STEP 1

STEP 2

368

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

After a system failure, see Fuse layout and amperage rat- ings (P. 370) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pull- out tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A Normal fuse Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

Type B Normal fuse Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an appropriate amperage rating. The amperage rating can be found on the fuse box lid.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

369

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Type C Normal fuse Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

Type D Normal fuse Blown fuse

Contact your Toyota dealer.

370

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

Engine compartment

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 MIR HTR 7.5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

2 RDI 25 A Electric cooling fan

3 (PUSH-AT) 7.5 A Engine control unit

4 ABS NO. 1 40 A ABS

5 HEATER 50 A Air conditioning system

6 WASHER 10 A Windshield washer

7 WIPER 30 A Windshield wipers

8 RR DEF 30 A Rear window defogger

9 (RR FOG) 10 A

10 D FR DOOR 25 A Power window (drivers side)

11 (CDS) 25 A Electric cooling fan

12 D-OP 25 A

13 ABS NO. 2 25 A ABS

14 D FL DOOR 25 A Power window (passengers side)

15 SPARE See note. Spare fuse

371

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

16 SPARE See note. Spare fuse

17 SPARE See note. Spare fuse

18 SPARE See note. Spare fuse

19 SPARE See note. Spare fuse

20 SPARE See note. Spare fuse

21 ST 7.5 A Starting system

22 ALT-S 7.5 A Charging system

23 (STR LOCK) 7.5 A Steering lock system

24 D/L 20 A Power door lock

25 ETCS 15 A Engine control unit

26 (AT+B) 7.5 A Transmission

27 (AM2 NO. 2) 7.5 A Smart key system

28 EFI (CTRL) 15 A Engine control unit

29 EFI (HTR) 15 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

30 EFI (IGN) 15 A Starting system

31 EFI (+B) 7.5 A Engine control unit

32 HAZ 15 A Turn signal lights, emergency flashers

33 MPX-B 7.5 A Automatic air conditioning system, gauge and meters

34 F/PMP 20 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

35 IG2 MAIN 30 A SRS airbag system, engine control unit

36 DCC 30 A Interior light, wireless remote con- trol, main body ECU

Fuse Ampere Circuit

372

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Note

One of each of the following spare fuses are provided: 7.5 A, 10 A, 15 A, 20 A, 25 A, 30 A.

37 HORN NO. 2 7.5 A Horn

38 HORN NO. 1 7.5 A Horn

39 H-LP LH LO 15 A Left-hand headlight (low beam)

40 H-LP RH LO 15 A Right-hand headlight (low beam)

41 H-LP LH HI 10 A Left-hand headlight (high beam)

42 H-LP RH HI 10 A Right-hand headlight (high beam)

43 INJ 30 A Multiport fuel injection system/ sequential multiport fuel injection system

44 H-LP WASHER 30 A

45 AM2 NO. 1 40 A Starting system, engine control unit

46 EPS 80 A Electric power steering

47 A/B MAIN 15 A SRS airbag system

48 ECU-B 7.5 A Wireless remote control, main body ECU

49 DOME 20 A Interior light

50 IG2 7.5 A Engine control unit

Fuse Ampere Circuit

373

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Instrument panel

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 ECU ACC 10 A Main body ECU, outside rear view mirrors

2 P/POINT No.2 15 A Power outlet 3 PANEL 10 A Illumination 4 TAIL 10 A Tail lights 5 DRL 10 A Daytime running light system 6 UNIT IG1 10 A Inside rear view mirror 7 STOP 7.5 A Stop lights 8 OBD 7.5 A On-board diagnosis system 9 HEATER-S 7.5 A Air conditioning system 10 HEATER 10 A Air conditioning system 11 FR FOG LH 10 A Left-hand front fog light 12 FR FOG RH 10 A Right-hand front fog light 13 BK/UP LP 7.5 A Back-up lights 14 ECU IG1 10 A ABS, electric power steering 15 AM1 7.5 A Starting system 16 AMP 15 A Audio system 17 AT UNIT 15 A Transmission

18 GAUGE 7.5 A Gauge and meters, smart key sys- tem

19 ECU IG2 10 A Engine control unit 20 SEAT HTR LH 10 A Left-hand seat heater 21 SEAT HTR RH 10 A Right-hand seat heater 22 RADIO 7.5 A Audio system 23 P/POINT No.1 15 A Power outlet

374

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

After a fuse is replaced If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb

may need replacement. (P. 375) If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer. If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

WARNING

To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire Observe the following precautions. Failing to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or injury. Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse. Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent. Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.

NOTICE

Before replacing fuses Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by your Toyota dealer.

375

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level of replacement varies depending on the bulb. If necessary bulb replacement seems difficult to perform, contact your Toyota dealer.

Preparing a replacement light bulb Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 469)

Front bulb locations

Rear bulb locations

Front side marker lights

Back-up lights

License plate lights

376

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Replacing light bulbs

Front side marker lights Turn the steering wheel in the opposite direction of the light to be replaced.

Turn the steering wheel to a point that allows your hand to easily fit between the tire and fender liner.

Remove the clips and partly remove the fender liner.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Release the light's claw.

Insert the screwdriver into the hole. While firmly pushing the screwdriver forward, move it towards the inside of the vehicle.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, wrap the tip of the screwdriver with a tape.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

377

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

Pull out the lamp and turn the lens counterclockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

378

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Back-up lights Remove the clips.

To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

379

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

License plate lights Turn the bulb base counterclock- wise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

Replacing the following bulbs If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by your Toyota dealer.

Headlights

Parking lights/daytime running lights

Front turn signal lights

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Stop/tail lights

Stop lights

Rear turn signal lights

Rear side marker lights

High mounted stoplight

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

380

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the light lens does not indicate a malfunction. Contact your Toyota dealer for more information in the following situations: Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens. Water has built up inside the light.

LED light bulbs The headlights, parking lights/daytime running lights, front turn signal lights, front fog lights (if equipped), stop/tail lights, stop lights, rear turn signal lights, rear side marker lights and high mounted stoplight consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle to your Toyota dealer to have the light replaced.

When replacing light bulbs Toyota recommends that you use genuine Toyota products designed for this vehicle. Because certain bulbs are connected to circuits designed to prevent over- load, non-genuine parts or parts not designed for this vehicle may be unus- able.

Removing and installing the luggage trim cover clip

Removing Installing

381

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

4

M aintenance and care

WARNING

Replacing light bulbs Turn off the lights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately after

turning off the lights. The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb. Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

Fully install the light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failure to do so may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering a light unit. This may damage the light or cause condensation to build up on the inner side of the lens.

When changing the back-up lights Stop the engine and wait until the exhaust pipes have cooled down suffi- ciently. The lights are located near the exhaust pipe and touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

To prevent damage or fire Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

382

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

When trouble arises 5

383

5-1. Essential information Emergency flashers ......... 384 If your vehicle needs to

be towed ........................ 385 If you think something

is wrong ......................... 393 Fuel pump shut off

system ........................... 394

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds... ........................ 395

If a warning message is displayed........................ 407

If you have a flat tire......... 424

If the engine will not start .......................... 435

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P................. 438

If you lose your keys ........ 439 If the electronic key does

not operate properly....... 440 If the battery is

discharged ..................... 444 If your vehicle

overheats ....................... 449 If the vehicle becomes

stuck .............................. 452 If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ..................... 454

384

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

Emergency flashers If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not operating, the battery may discharge.

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn them off, press the switch once again.

5

W hen trouble arises

385

5-1. Essential information

If the vehicle is trapped in rising water

Remove the seat belt first.

If the door can be opened, open the door and exit the vehicle.

If the door can not be opened, open the window using the power window switch and exit the vehicle through the window.

If the window can not be opened using the power window switch, remain calm, wait until the water level inside the vehicle rises to the point that the water pressure inside of the vehicle equals the water pressure outside of the vehicle, and then open the door and exit the vehicle.

WARNING

Using an emergency hammer* for emergency escape The front side windows and rear side windows, as well as the rear window can be shattered with an emergency hammer* used for emergency escape. However, an emergency hammer* can not shatter the windshield as it is laminated glass. *: Contact your Toyota dealer or aftermarket accessory manufacturer for fur-

ther information about an emergency hammer. Escaping the vehicle from the window

There are cases where escaping the vehicle from the window is not possible due to seating position, passenger body type, etc. When using an emergency hammer, consider your seat location and the size of the window opening to ensure that the opening is accessible and large enough to escape.

In the event the vehicle is submerged in water, remain calm and per- form the following.

386

5-1. Essential information

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact your Toyota dealer before towing.

The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing eyelet. This should only be attempted on hard surfaced roads for short distances at low speeds. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The vehicles wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in good condition.

For vehicles with an automatic transmission, only the front towing eyelet may be used.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by your Toyota dealer or a commercial towing service, using a lift-type truck or a flat bed truck. Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro- vincial and local laws. If towing from the rear, the vehicle's front wheels and axles must be in good condition. (P. 392) If they are damaged, use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

5

W hen trouble arises

387

5-1. Essential information

Towing eyelet

Before emergency towing Release the parking brake. Shift the shift lever to N. Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the ACC (engine off) or ON (engine running) position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY (engine off) or IGNITION ON (engine running) mode.

If towing a vehicle Do not tow another vehicle. If towing a vehicle that has broken down is unavoidable, avoid towing a vehicle that is heavier than your vehicle. Also, do not pull out a vehicle that has fallen into a ditch.

WARNING

Caution while towing Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive stress on the emergency towing eyelets and the cables or chains. Always be cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

388

5-1. Essential information

NOTICE

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission in emergency towing (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Never tow a vehicle from the rear with four wheels on the ground. This may cause serious damage to the transmission.

To prevent damage to the vehicle When towing this vehicle, make sure to observe the following:

Do not use a wire rope Keep vehicle speed below 20 mph (30 km/h) and do not tow for dis-

tances over 19 miles (30 km) Tow the vehicle in the forward direction Do not apply rope to the vehicle's suspension and so forth

Do not tow another vehicle, boat (trailer) and so forth, that is heavier than this vehicle.

When towing down a long slope Use a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck. (P. 392, 393) If a wheel lift-type or flat bed truck is not used, the brakes may overheat, leading to poor brake performance.

5

W hen trouble arises

389

5-1. Essential information

Installing a towing eyelet

Remove the eyelet cover(s). To prevent damage to the vehicle, cover the tip of the screwdriver with a rag.

Front Remove the upper cover using a flathead screwdriver and then pull the lower cover outward by hand to remove it.

Upper cover Lower cover

Rear

STEP 1

390

5-1. Essential information

Insert the towing eyelet into the hole and tighten partially by hand.

Tighten down the towing eyelet securely using a wheel nut wrench.

STEP 2

STEP 3

Location of the emergency towing eyelet P. 425

WARNING

Installing towing eyelets to the vehicle Make sure that towing eyelet is installed securely. If not securely installed, towing eyelets may come loose during towing. This may lead to accidents that cause serious injury or even death.

After towing Always remove the towing eyelet. Failure to do so can cause the SRS air-

bags to not operate correctly in the event of a frontal collision. Always remove the towing eyelets. Failure to do so may prevent the fuel

pump shut off system from operating properly if the vehicle receives an impact from the rear.

5

W hen trouble arises

391

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a sling-type truck

NOTICE

To prevent body damage Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

392

5-1. Essential information

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From the front Vehicles with an automatic trans- mission: Use a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

Vehicles with a manual transmis- sion: We recommend using a towing dolly under the rear wheels.

When not using a towing dolly, release the parking brake and shift the shift lever to N.

From the rear Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the ACC position so that the steering wheel is unlocked.

Vehicles with a smart key sys- tem: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY mode so that the steering wheel is unlocked.

5

W hen trouble arises

393

5-1. Essential information

Using a flat bed truck

If you use chains or cables to tie down your vehicle, the angles shaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie downs or the vehicle may be damaged.

NOTICE

To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission when towing using a wheel-lift type truck (vehicles with an automatic transmission) Never tow this vehicle from the front with the rear wheels on the ground.

To prevent damaging the vehicle Vehicles without a smart key system: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear

when the engine switch is in the LOCK position or the key is removed. The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

Vehicles with a smart key system: Do not tow the vehicle from the rear when the ENGINE START STOP switch is off. The steering lock mecha- nism is not strong enough to hold the front wheels straight.

When raising the vehicle from the rear, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the vehicle could be damaged while being towed from the rear.

394

5-1. Essential information

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably needs adjustment or repair. Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

Visible symptoms Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points higher than normal

Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or illumi- nates

Audible symptoms Changes in exhaust sound

Excessive tire squeal when cornering

Strange noises related to the suspension system

Pinging or other noises related to the engine

Operational symptoms Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

Appreciable loss of power

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost touches the floor

5

W hen trouble arises

395

5-1. Essential information

Fuel pump shut off system

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is activated.

Vehicles without a smart key system Turn the engine switch to the ACC or LOCK position.

Restart the engine.

Vehicles with a smart key system Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY mode or turn it off.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

Before starting the engine Inspect the ground under the vehicle. If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

When the vehicle sustains an impact in an accident, etc., the fuel pump shut off system operates to stop supplying fuel in order to minimize fuel leakage.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 1

STEP 2

396

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys- tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Brake system warning light Low brake fluid Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully released the system is operating normally.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

5

W hen trouble arises

397

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi- cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the vehicles charging system.

Low engine oil pressure warning light Indicates that the engine oil pressure is too low.

(Flashes or illu- minates in red)

High engine coolant temperature warning light (if equipped)

Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (P. 450) As the engine coolant temperature increases, this warning light will change from flashing to constantly illuminated.

398

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Malfunction indicator lamp Indicates a malfunction in: The electronic engine control system; The electronic throttle control system; The electronic automatic transmission control system.

SRS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: The SRS airbag system; The seat belt pretensioner system; The front passenger occupant classification system.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

ABS warning light Indicates a malfunction in: The ABS; The brake assist system.

Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer) Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steer- ing) system.

Slip indicator Indicates a malfunction in: The VSC system; The TRAC system; The hill-start assist control system.

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling system.

5

W hen trouble arises

399

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(Comes on in yellow)

Cruise control indicator light Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control system.

If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving First check the following: Is the fuel tank empty?

If it is, fill the fuel tank immediately. Is the fuel tank cap loose?

If it is, tighten it securely. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several driving trips. If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off even after several trips, con- tact your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

SRS warning light P. 125

Electric power steering warning light (warning buzzer) The electric power steering warning light may come on and the warning buzzer may sound when the voltage is low or the voltage drops.

WARNING

When the electric power steering warning light comes on The steering wheel may become extremely heavy. If the steering wheel becomes heavier than usual when operating, hold firmly and operate using more force than usual.

Warning light Warning light/Details

400

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure Open door warning light (if equipped)

Indicates that a door or the trunk is not fully closed.

Check that both side doors and the trunk are closed.

(Comes on in yellow)

Low fuel level warning light

Remaining fuel (Approximately 1.8 gal. [7.0 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.] or less)

Refuel the vehicle.

(On the instru- ment cluster)

Drivers seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*1

Warns the driver to fasten his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

(On the center panel)

Front passengers seat belt reminder light (warning buzzer)*2

Warns the front passenger to fasten his or her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

5

W hen trouble arises

401

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Tire pressure warning light

When the light comes on: Low tire inflation pressure such as Natural causes (P. 403) Flat tire (P. 425)

Adjust the tire inflation pressure to the specified level.

The light will turn off after a few minutes. In case the light does not turn off even if the tire inflation pressure is adjusted, have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

When the light comes on after blinking for approxi- mately one minute: Malfunction in the tire pres- sure warning system (P. 404)

Have the system checked by your Toyota dealer.

Automatic transmission fluid temperature warning light (if equipped)

Indicates that the auto- matic transmission fluid temperature is too high.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the shift lever to P. If the light goes off after a lit- tle while, the vehicle can be driven. If the light does not go off, contact your Toyota dealer.

Master warning light (if equipped)

A buzzer sounds and the warning light comes on and flashes to indicate that the master warning system has detected a malfunction.

P. 408

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

402

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

*1: Drivers seat belt buzzer:

Vehicles without a smart key system

The drivers seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the engine switch is turned to the ON position, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

Vehicles with a smart key system

The drivers seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the driver that his or her seat belt is not fastened. Once the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode, the buzzer sounds for 6 seconds. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h), the buzzer sounds once. If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

*2: Front passengers seat belt buzzer:

The front passengers seat belt buzzer sounds to alert the front passenger that his or her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer sounds once if the vehi- cle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h). If the seat belt is still unfastened after 24 seconds, the buzzer will sound intermittently for 10 seconds. Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound in a different tone for 20 more seconds.

5

W hen trouble arises

403

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder and warning buzzer If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger

detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash and warning buzzer to sound, even if a passenger is not sitting in the seat.

If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen- ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

When the tire pressure warning light comes on Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust to the appropriate level.

The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes The tire pressure warning light may turn on due to natural causes such as natural air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes caused by tem- perature. In this case, adjusting the tire inflation pressure will turn off the warning light (after a few minutes).

When a tire is replaced with a spare tire The compact spare tire is not equipped with a tire pressure warning valve and transmitter. If a tire goes flat, the tire pressure warning light will not turn off even though the flat tire has been replaced with the spare tire. Replace the spare tire with the repaired tire and adjust the tire infla- tion pressure. The tire pressure warning light will go off after a few min- utes.

404

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the tire pressure warning system is inoperative The tire pressure warning system will be disabled in the following condi- tions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) If tires not equipped with tire pressure warning valves and transmit-

ters are used. If the ID code on the tire pressure warning valves and transmitters is

not registered in the tire pressure warning computer. If the tire inflation pressure is 55 psi (380 kPa, 3.87 kgf/cm2 or bar) or

higher. The tire pressure warning system may be disabled in the following condi- tions: (When the condition becomes normal, the system will work properly.) If electronic devices or facilities using similar radio wave frequencies

are nearby. If a radio set at similar frequencies is in use in the vehicle. If a window tint that affects the radio wave signals is installed. If there is a lot of snow or ice on the vehicle, in particular around the

wheels or wheel housings. If non-genuine Toyota wheels are used. (Even if you use Toyota

wheels, the tire pressure warning system may not work properly with some types of tires.)

If tire chains are used. If a large metallic object which can interfere with signal reception is

put in the trunk. If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking

for approximately one minute If the tire pressure warning light frequently comes on after blinking for approximately one minute when the ENGINE START STOP switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode (vehicles with a smart key system) or the engine switch is turned to the ON position (vehicles without a smart key system), have it checked your Toyota dealer.

5

W hen trouble arises

405

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

If the tire pressure warning light comes on Be sure to observe the following precautions. Failure to do so could cause loss of vehicle control and result in death or serious injury. Stop your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately. If the tire pressure warning light comes on even after tire inflation pres-

sure adjustment, it is probable that you have a flat tire. Check the tires. If the tire is flat, change to the spare tire and have the flat tire repaired by the nearest Toyota dealer.

Avoid abrupt maneuvering and braking. If the vehicle tires deteriorate, you could lose control of the steering wheel or the brakes.

If a blowout or sudden air leakage should occur The tire pressure warning system may not activate immediately.

406

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

Maintenance of the tires Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label (tire and load information label). (If your vehicle has tires of a differ- ent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label [tire and load information label], you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS-tire pressure warning system) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light) illumi- nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under- inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Please note that the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) is not a sub- stitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operat- ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunction indi- cator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale (tire pressure warning light). When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illumi- nated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illumi- nated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

5

W hen trouble arises

407

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

TPMS (tire pressure warning system) malfunctions may occur for a vari- ety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS (tire pres- sure warning system) malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alter- nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure warning system) to continue to function properly.

NOTICE

To ensure the tire pressure warning system operates properly Do not install tires with different specifications or makers, as the tire pressure warning system may not operate properly.

408

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning message is displayed (vehicles with a color multi-information display)

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys- tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning message Details

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates that: The brake fluid level is low; or The brake system is malfunctioning

A buzzer also sounds.

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and perform the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light also comes on or flashes in order to indicate that a message is cur- rently being displayed on the multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning light comes on again after the following actions have been performed, contact your Toyota dealer.

5

W hen trouble arises

409

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi- cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact your Toyota dealer.

Warning message Details

(Comes on in red)

Indicates that the engine is almost overheating. (P. 450)

A buzzer also sounds.

410

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident. Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately.

Warning message Details

Indicates a malfunction in: The SRS airbag system; The seat belt pretensioner system; The front passenger occupant detection system.

A buzzer also sounds.

(U.S.A.)

(Canada)

Indicates a malfunction in: The ABS; The brake assist system.

A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates a malfunction in the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system.

A buzzer also sounds.

5

W hen trouble arises

411

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates a malfunction in the smart key system. A buzzer also sounds.

Warning message Details

412

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or more of the doors is not fully closed

The system also indi- cates which doors are not fully closed. If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

km/h),

flashes to indicate that the door(s) are not yet fully closed.

Make sure that both side doors are closed.

Indicates that the trunk is not fully closed

If the vehicle reaches a speed of 3 mph (5

km/h),

flashes to indicate that the trunk is not yet fully closed.

Close the trunk.

5

W hen trouble arises

413

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

*: This distance is computed based on your average fuel consumption. As a result, the actual distance that can be driven may differ from that displayed.

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

Indicates that the auto- matic transmission fluid temperature is too high.

A buzzer also sounds.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and shift the shift lever to P. If the message is cleared after a little while, the vehicle can be driven. If the mes- sage is not cleared, contact your Toyota dealer.

(Flashes)

Indicates that the lights are left on when the ENGINE START STOP switch is off and the drivers door opened.

A buzzer also sounds.

Turn the lights off.

(Comes on in yellow)

Indicates that remain- ing fuel is approxi- mately 1.8 gal. (7.0 L, 1.5 Imp. gal.) or less

The estimated remaining driving range will be dis- played under this warning message.*

Refuel the vehicle.

Roads may be icy due to the low outside tem- perature.

Drive carefully avoiding sudden acceleration, sudden braking, sud- den deceleration, and sharp turns.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

414

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem, check that the warning message and light go off.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

Once

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates that the electronic key is not present when attempting to start the engine.

Confirm the loca- tion of the electronic key.

Once 3 times (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates that a door other than the drivers door has been opened and closed with the ENGINE START STOP switch in any mode other than off and the elec- tronic key out- side of the detection area.

Confirm the loca- tion of the electronic key.

5

W hen trouble arises

415

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once 3 times (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

The electronic key was carried outside the vehi- cle and the drivers door was opened and closed while the shift position P was selected with- out turning off the ENGINE START STOP switch.

Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off or bring the elec- tronic key back into the vehi- cle.

Once 3 times (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

The electronic key was carried outside the vehi- cle and the drivers door was opened and closed while the shift position N was selected with- out turning off the ENGINE START STOP switch.

Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off or bring the elec- tronic key back into the vehi- cle.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

416

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

Contin- uous (5 sec- onds)

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

An attempt was made to exit the vehicle with the electronic key and touch the lock sensor to lock the doors without first turn- ing the ENGINE START STOP switch off.

Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off and lock the doors again.

Intermit- tently (7 seconds)

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

An attempt was made to drive when the regular key was not inside the vehi- cle.

Confirm that the electronic key is inside the vehicle.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

5

W hen trouble arises

417

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Contin- uous

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

The drivers door was opened while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the ENGINE START STOP switch.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Contin- uous

Contin- uous

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

The electronic key was carried outside the vehi- cle and the drivers door was opened and closed while any shift position other than P was selected without turning off the ENGINE START STOP switch.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Bring the electronic key back into the vehicle.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

418

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Contin- uous (5 sec- onds)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to lock the doors using the smart key sys- tem while the electronic key was still inside the vehicle.

Retrieve the elec- tronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

Once

Contin- uous (5 sec- onds)

(Flashes)

An attempt was made to lock either door by opening a door and putting the lock lever into the lock position, then closing the door by pulling on the outside door handle with the electronic key still inside the vehi- cle.

Retrieve the elec- tronic key from the vehicle and lock the doors again.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

5

W hen trouble arises

419

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

When the doors were unlocked with the mechani- cal key and then the ENGINE START STOP switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.

The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the ENGINE START STOP switch was pressed two con- secutive times.

Touch the electronic key to the ENGINE START STOP switch while depress- ing the brake pedal.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

420

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once (Flashes)

(Flashes in yellow)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

When the doors were unlocked with the mechani- cal key and then the ENGINE START STOP switch was pressed, the electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle.

The electronic key could not be detected in the vehicle even after the ENGINE START STOP switch was pressed two con- secutive times.

Touch the electronic key to the ENGINE START STOP switch while depress- ing the clutch pedal.

Once

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

An attempt was made to start the engine with the shift lever in an incorrect position.

Shift the shift lever to P and start the engine.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

5

W hen trouble arises

421

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Power was turned off due to the automatic power off func- tion.

Next time when starting the engine, increase the engine speed slightly and main- tain that level for approxi- mately 5 minutes to recharge the bat- tery.

Once

(Flashes in yellow)

Indicates that the electronic key battery is low.

Replace the bat- tery. (P. 363)

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

422

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

The drivers door was opened and closed with the ENGINE START STOP switch turned off and then the ENGINE START STOP switch was put in ACCESSORY mode twice with- out the engine being started.

Press the ENGINE START STOP switch while depress- ing the brake pedal.

During an engine starting proce- dure in the event that the electronic key was not func- tioning properly (P. 442), the ENGINE START STOP switch was touched with the electronic key.

Press the ENGINE START STOP switch while depress- ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

5

W hen trouble arises

423

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with a manual transmission)

The drivers door was opened and closed with the ENGINE START STOP switch turned off and then the ENGINE START STOP switch was put in ACCESSORY mode twice with- out the engine being started.

Press the ENGINE START STOP switch while depress- ing the clutch pedal.

During an engine starting proce- dure in the event that the electronic key was not func- tioning properly (P. 442), the ENGINE START STOP switch was touched with the electronic key.

Press the ENGINE START STOP switch while depress- ing the clutch pedal within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

424

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Once

(Flashes)

(Flashes quickly in green)

Indicates that the steering lock has not been released.

Release the steer- ing lock. (P. 172)

Con- tinu- ous

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

The ENGINE START STOP switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a position other than P.

Shift the shift lever to P.

Once

(Flashes)

(Vehicles with an auto- matic transmission)

After the ENGINE START STOP switch has been turned off with the shift lever in a posi- tion other than P, the shift lever has been shifted to P.

Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off.

Warning buzzer In some cases, the buzzer may not be heard because of noisy place or an audio sound.

Interior buzzer

Exterior buzzer Warning message Details Correction

procedure

5

W hen trouble arises

425

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you have a flat tire

Your vehicle is equipped with a spare tire. The flat tire can be replaced with the spare tire.

Before jacking up the vehicle Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

Set the parking brake.

Shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmis- sion) or R (vehicles with a manual transmission).

Stop the engine.

Turn on the emergency flashers. (P. 384)

Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

*: Vehicles with a T145/70D17 compact spare tire

Jack

Jack handle

Spare tire

Towing eyelet

Screwdriver

Wheel nut wrench

Spacer*

426

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Taking out the spare tire

Remove the luggage mat.

Remove the cover and loosen the center fastener that secures the spare tire.

STEP 1

STEP 2

5

W hen trouble arises

427

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts (one turn).

STEP 1

Flat tire Wheel

chock posi- tions

Front

Left- hand side

Behind the rear right- hand side tire

Right- hand side

Behind the rear left- hand side tire

Rear

Left- hand side

In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right- hand side

In front of the front left-hand side tire

STEP 2

428

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Turn the tire jack portion A by hand until the notch of the jack is in contact with the jack point.

Raise the vehicle until the tire is slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and the tire.

When resting the tire on the ground, place the tire so that the wheel design faces up to avoid scratching the wheel surface.

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

5

W hen trouble arises

429

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign mat- ter from the wheel contact sur- face.

If foreign matter is on the wheel contact surface, the wheel nuts may loosen while the vehicle is in motion, and the tire may come off the vehicle.

Install the spare tire and loosely tighten each wheel nut by hand to approximately the same amount.

Tighten the wheel nuts until the tapered portion comes into loose contact with the disc wheel seat.

Lower the vehicle.

Firmly tighten each nut two or three times in the order shown in the illustration.

Tightening torque: 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

STEP 1

Tapered portion

Disc wheel seat

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

430

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stow the flat tire, tire jack and all tools. (P. 431)

The compact spare tire The compact spare tire is identified by the label TEMPORARY USE

ONLY on the tire sidewall. Use the compact spare tire temporarily only in an emergency.

Make sure to check the tire pressure of the compact spare tire. (P. 468)

When using the compact spare tire As the compact spare tire is not equipped with the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, low inflation pressure of the spare tire will not be warned. Also, if you replace the compact spare tire after the tire pressure warning light comes on, the light remains on.

If you have a flat rear tire Install the compact spare tire on the front of the vehicle. Perform the fol- lowing steps.

Replace a front tire with the compact spare tire. Replace the flat rear tire with the tire removed from the front of the vehicle.

After completing the tire change The tire pressure warning system must be reset. (P. 346)

STEP 5

STEP 1

STEP 2

5

W hen trouble arises

431

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Storing a tire (for compact spare tire)

Storing a tire (except compact spare tire)

Vehicles with a T145/70D17 compact spare tire only: Install the spare tire spacer with the Ft mark facing the front of the vehicle and the rear edge of the spacer contacting the vehicle body.

Install the center fastener as shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

STEP 2

Vehicles with a T145/70D17 compact spare tire only: Before stowing the flat tire, remove the spare tire spacer.

Install the center fastener as shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

STEP 2

432

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

Using the tire jack Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the vehicle suddenly falling off the jack. Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or

installing and removing tire chains. Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat

tire. Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replacing tires on this vehicle.

Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point. Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack. Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the

jack. When raising the vehicle, make sure that no one is in the vehicle and

unload all luggage from the vehicle. When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack. Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to

replace the tire. Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle. Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working on or near the vehicle may be injured.

5

W hen trouble arises

433

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

Replacing a flat tire Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-

ately after the vehicle has been driven. After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the wheel while the vehicle is moving.

Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury. Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 89 ftlbf (120

Nm, 12.2 kgfm) as soon as possible after changing wheels. When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifi-

cally designed for that wheel. If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut

threads or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer.

When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered ends facing inward. (P. 358)

434

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

When using the compact spare tire Remember that your compact spare tire is specifically designed for

use with your vehicle. Do not use your compact spare tire on another vehicle.

Do not use two compact spare tires simultaneously. Replace the compact spare tire with a standard tire as soon as possi-

ble. Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shift-

ing operations that cause sudden engine braking. Install the compact spare tire on a front wheel.

When storing the compact spare tire Be careful not to catch fingers or other body parts between the compact spare tire and the body of the vehicle.

Speed limit when using the compact spare tire Do not drive at speeds in excess of 50 mph (80 km/h) when a compact spare tire is installed on the vehicle. The compact spare tire is not designed for driving at high speeds. Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or seri- ous injury.

When the compact spare tire is attached The vehicle speed may not be correctly detected, and the following sys- tems may not operate correctly: ABS & brake assist VSC TRAC EPS Cruise control

5

W hen trouble arises

435

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire. Do not continue driving with a flat tire. Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the wheel beyond repair.

Be careful when driving over bumps with the compact spare tire installed on the vehicle. The vehicle becomes lower when driving with the compact spare tire compared to when driving with standard tires. Be careful when driving over uneven road surfaces.

Driving with tire chains and the compact spare tire Do not fit tire chains to the compact spare tire. Tire chains may damage the vehicle body and adversely affect driving performance.

When replacing the tires When removing or fitting the wheels, tires or the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter, contact your Toyota dealer as the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may be damaged if not handled correctly.

To avoid damage to the tire pressure warning valves and transmit- ters When a tire is repaired with liquid sealants, the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter may not operate properly. If a liquid sealant is used, contact your Toyota dealer or other qualified service shop as soon as possible. Make sure to replace the tire pressure warning valve and transmitter when replacing the tire. (P. 346)

Stowing the jack When stowing the jack in the jack holder, make sure that the part that the jack handle attaches to is pointing towards the inside of the trunk. Failure to do so may damage the vehicle body.

Replacing a flat tire Do not hit and bend the disc rotor backing plate when removing and installing the tire. A bent backing plate may scrape against the disc rotor and cause noise while the vehicle is in motion.

436

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the engine will not start

If the engine will not start even though correct starting procedures are being followed (P. 166, 175), consider each of the following points.

The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper- ates normally. One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicles tank. Refuel the vehicle.

The engine may be flooded. Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting procedures. (P. 166, 175)

There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system. (P. 79)

The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at a low volume. One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

The battery may be discharged. (P. 445)

The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

The starter motor does not turn over. (vehicles with a smart key system) The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How- ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine. (P. 437)

5

W hen trouble arises

437

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Emergency start function (vehicles with a smart key system)

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as an interim measure to start the engine if the ENGINE START STOP switch is functioning normally:

Vehicles with an automatic transmission Set the parking brake. Put the shift lever in P. Set the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY mode. Press and hold the ENGINE START STOP switch about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound. One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

The battery may be discharged. (P. 445)

There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system. (vehi- cles with a smart key system)

Contact your Toyota dealer if the problem cannot be repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

438

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Vehicles with a manual transmission Set the parking brake. Put the shift lever in N. Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY mode. Push and hold the ENGINE START STOP switch for about 15 seconds while depressing the brake pedal and clutch pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

5

W hen trouble arises

439

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P (vehicles with an automatic transmission)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by your Toyota dealer immediately. The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake. Vehicles without a smart key system: Turn the engine switch to the ACC position. Vehicles with a smart key system: Turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to ACCESSORY mode. Depress the brake pedal.

Pry the cover up with a flat- head screwdriver or equiva- lent.

Press the shift lock override button.

The shift lever can be shifted while the button is pressed.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

440

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If you lose your keys

New genuine keys can be made by your Toyota dealer. For vehicles without a smart key system, bring a master key and the key number stamped on the key number plate. For vehicles with a smart key sys- tem, bring the other key and the key number stamped on the key number plate.

5

W hen trouble arises

441

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the electronic key does not operate properly (vehicles with a smart key system)

Unlocking and locking the doors, unlocking the trunk

Use the mechanical key built in to the electronic keys to operate the doors and trunk. (P. 23)

Vehicles with an alarm: An alarm will sound if the alarm is set when the trunk or doors are unlocked. (P. 82)

Doors Locks drivers door Unlocks drivers door

Trunk Turn the mechanical key clock- wise to open.

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter- rupted (P. 31) or the electronic key cannot be used because the battery is depleted, the smart key system and wireless remote con- trol cannot be used. In such cases, the doors and trunk can be opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure below.

442

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the engine

Vehicles with an automatic transmission Ensure that the shift lever is in P and firmly depress the brake pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the ENGINE START STOP switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the ENGINE START STOP switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization set- ting, the ENGINE START STOP switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the brake pedal and check that the smart key system indicator light (green) turns on. Press the ENGINE START STOP switch.

In the event that the ENGINE START STOP switch still cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

5

W hen trouble arises

443

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Vehicles with a manual transmission Ensure that the shift lever is in N and depress the clutch pedal.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of the electronic key to the ENGINE START STOP switch.

When the electronic key is detected, a buzzer sounds and the ENGINE START STOP switch will turn to IGNITION ON mode.

When the smart key system is deactivated in customization set- ting, the ENGINE START STOP switch will turn to ACCESSORY mode.

Firmly depress the clutch pedal and check that the smart key system indicator light (green) turns on. Press the ENGINE START STOP switch.

In the event that the ENGINE START STOP switch still cannot be operated, contact your Toyota dealer.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

444

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Stopping the engine Vehicles with an automatic transmission: Shift the shift lever to P and press the ENGINE START STOP switch as you normally do when stopping the engine. Vehicles with a manual transmission: Shift the shift lever to N and press the ENGINE START STOP switch as you normally do when stopping the engine.

Replacing the key battery As the above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes. (P. 363)

Alarm Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system. If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set, the alarm may be triggered. (P. 82)

Changing ENGINE START STOP switch modes Vehicles with an automatic transmission Release the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START STOP switch in

above.The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 169) Vehicles with a manual transmission Release the clutch pedal and press the ENGINE START STOP switch in

above.The engine does not start and modes will be changed each time the switch is pressed. (P. 169)

If the doors cannot be locked or unlocked by the smart key system Lock and unlock the doors by the mechanical key or wireless remote control.

STEP 3

STEP 3

5

W hen trouble arises

445

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi- cle's battery is discharged. You can call your Toyota dealer or a qualified repair shop.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi- cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your vehicle following the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables according to the following pro- cedures:

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in the illustration.

STEP 1

446

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5 minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle. Vehicles with a smart key system only: Open and close any of the doors of your vehicle with the ENGINE START STOP switch off. Vehicles without a smart key system: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the engine switch to the ON position, then start the vehicle's engine. Vehicles with a smart key system: Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn the ENGINE START STOP switch to IGNITION ON mode, then start the vehi- cle's engine. Once the vehicles engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con- nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

5

W hen trouble arises

447

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

Starting the engine when the battery is discharged The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

Avoiding a discharged battery Turn off the headlights and the air conditioning system while the engine is

off. Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-

ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc. Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer- tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges automatically during driving.)

Precautions when the battery is discharged (vehicles with a smart key system) In some cases, it may not be possible to unlock the doors using the smart

key system when the battery is discharged. Use the wireless remote con- trol or the mechanical key to lock or unlock the doors.

The engine may not start on the first attempt after the battery has recharged but will start normally after the second attempt. This is not a malfunction.

The ENGINE START STOP switch mode is memorized by the vehicle. When the battery is reconnected, the system will return to the mode it was in before the battery was discharged. Before disconnecting the bat- tery, turn the ENGINE START STOP switch off. If you are unsure what mode the ENGINE START STOP switch was in before the battery discharged, be especially careful when reconnecting the battery.

448

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

Avoiding battery fires or explosions Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam- mable gas that may be emitted from the battery. Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it

is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi- nal.

Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the + and - ter- minals.

Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near the battery.

Battery precautions The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre- cautions when handling the battery. When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing or the vehicle body.

Do not lean over the battery. In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention. Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention can be received.

Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and other battery-related parts.

Do not allow children near the battery. To prevent damage to the vehicle

Do not pull- or push-start the vehicle as the three-way catalytic converter may overheat and become a fire hazard.

5

W hen trouble arises

449

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

NOTICE

When handling jumper cables Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fans or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

When closing the doors While pushing the door glass towards the inside of the vehicle, slowly close the door. Because the side window open/close function linked to door operation will not operate, the window may interfere with the vehicle body, possibly scratching both the vehicle body and window, or even shattering the window.

450

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle overheats

Correction procedures

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition- ing system, and then stop the engine. If you see steam: Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides. If you do not see steam: Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled down sufficiently, inspect the hoses and radiator core (radia- tor) for any leaks.

Radiator Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks, immediately contact your Toyota dealer.

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display: The engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 191) enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced (for example, the vehicle speed does not increase). Vehicles with a color multi-information display: The high engine coolant temperature warning light (P. 194) flashes or illumi- nates or a loss of engine power is experienced (for example, the vehicle speed does not increase).

Steam comes out from under the hood.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

5

W hen trouble arises

451

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the FULL and LOW lines on the reservoir.

Reservoir FULL LOW Radiator cap

Add coolant if necessary.

Water can be used in an emer- gency if coolant is unavailable.

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses. The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these, turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly. (The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fans are not operating: Stop the engine immediately and contact your Toyota dealer. If the fans are operating: Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest Toyota dealer.

STEP 4

STEP 5

STEP 6

STEP 7

452

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of your vehicle If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until

the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus- ing serious injuries such as burns.

Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be caught, resulting in serious injury.

Do not loosen the radiator cap and the coolant reservoir cap while the engine and radiator are hot. Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam released under pressure.

NOTICE

When adding engine coolant Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant. When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too quickly can cause damage to the engine.

To prevent damage to the cooling system Observe the following precautions: Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust

etc.). Do not use any coolant additives.

5

W hen trouble arises

453

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If the vehicle becomes stuck

When it is difficult to free the vehicle

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow:

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to P (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or N (vehicles with a manual transmission). Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear wheels. Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear wheels to help provide traction. Restart the engine. Shift the shift lever to the D or R position (vehicles with an automatic transmission) or 1 or R position (vehicles with a manual transmission) and release the parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the accelerator pedal.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 5

Press to turn off TRAC.

454

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

When attempting to free a stuck vehicle If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur- rounding area is clear to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free. Use extreme caution.

When shifting the shift lever For vehicles with an automatic transmission, be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed. This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

To avoid damage to the transmission and other components Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more

than necessary. If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,

the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

5

W hen trouble arises

455

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro- cedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly depress it. Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to N.

If the shift lever is shifted to N After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road. Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to N Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce vehicle speed as much as possible.

Vehicles without a smart key system: Stop the engine by turning the engine switch to the ACC position.

STEP 1

STEP 2

STEP 3

STEP 4

STEP 3

STEP 4

456

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

WARNING

If the engine has to be turned off while driving Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the

brake pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate as much as possible before turning off the engine.

Vehicles without a smart key system: Never attempt to remove the key, as doing so will lock the steering wheel.

Vehicles with a smart key sys- tem: To stop the engine, press and hold the ENGINE START STOP switch for 2 consecu- tive seconds or more, or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

Press and hold for 2 seconds or more, or press briefly 3 times or more

STEP 4

STEP 5

Vehicle specifications 6

457

6-1. Specifications Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ......... 458 Fuel information ............... 470 Tire information ................ 474

6-2. Customization Customizable features ..... 487

458

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weight

*: Unladen vehicle

Overall length 166.7 in. (4235 mm)

Overall width 69.9 in. (1775 mm)

Overall height* 52.0 in. (1320 mm)

Wheelbase 101.2 in. (2570 mm)

Tread Front 59.8 in. (1520 mm)

Rear 60.6 in. (1540 mm)

Vehicle capacity weight (Occupants + luggage)

Details are described on the tire and load- ing information label. (P. 353)

459

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Vehicle identification

Vehicle identification number The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped under the right-hand front seat.

This number is located on the top left of the body panel.

This number is also on the Certi- fication Label.

460

6-1. Specifications

Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

461

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Engine

Fuel

*: If unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) is not available, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability.

Model FA20

Type Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled 4 cylinder, 4- stroke gasoline

Bore and stroke 3.39 3.39 in. (86.0 86.0 mm)

Displacement 121.93 cu.in. (1998 cm3)

Drive belt tension Automatic adjustment

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only

Octane rating 93 (Research octane number 98) or higher* Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 13.2 gal. (50 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.)

462

6-1. Specifications

Lubrication system

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and check the oil level on the dipstick.

Engine oil selection Toyota Genuine Motor Oil is used in your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or equivalent to satisfy the following grade and viscosity.

Oil grade: ILSAC GF-5 multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity: SAE 0W-20

SAE 0W-20 is the best choice for good fuel economy and good starting in cold weather. If SAE 0W-20 is not available, SAE 5W-20 oil may be used. However, it must be replaced with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil change.

Oil capacity (Drain and refill reference*) Without filter With filter

5.5 qt. (5.2 L, 4.6 Imp. qt.) 5.7 qt. (5.4 L, 4.8 Imp. qt.)

Outside temperature

463

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity (one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

How to read oil container label:

The International Lubricant Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC) Certification Mark is added to some oil containers to help you select the oil you should use.

464

6-1. Specifications

Cooling system

Ignition system

Capacity

Vehicles with an automatic transmission 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Vehicles with a manual transmission 7.6 qt. (7.2 L, 6.3 Imp. qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following. TOYOTA Genuine 50/50 Pre-mixed Super Long

Life Coolant BLUE Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based non-

silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid organic acid technol- ogy

Do not use plain water alone.

Spark plug

Make Gap

DENSO ZXE27HBR8 0.031 in. (0.8 mm)

NOTICE

Iridium-tipped spark plugs Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

465

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Electrical system

Differential

*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil at the factory. Use Toyota approved Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil or an equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please con- tact your Toyota dealer for further details.

Battery

Specific gravity reading at 68F (20C):

1.250 1.290 Fully charged 1.160 1.200 Half charged 1.060 1.100 Discharged

Charging rates

Quick charge Slow charge

15 A max. 5 A max.

Oil capacity (Refer- ence) 1.20 qt. (1.15 L, 1.01 Imp. qt.)

Oil type and viscosity* Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX Other LSD gear oil that meets API GL-5 and

SAE 75W-85

NOTICE

Differential gear oil Using a differential gear oil other than Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LX may cause occurrences of noises, vibrations and poor fuel consumption. Never use different brands together.

466

6-1. Specifications

Automatic transmission

*: The fluid capacity is provided as a reference. If replacement is necessary, contact your Toyota dealer.

Manual transmission

*: The recommended oil grade is API GL-3. However, API GL-4 can also be used.

Fluid capac- ity* 7.9 qt. (7.5 L, 6.6 Imp. qt.)

Fluid type TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

Using automatic transmission fluid other than TOYOTA Genuine ATF WS may cause deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accom- panied by vibration, and ultimately damage the automatic transmission of your vehicle.

Gear oil capacity (Reference) 2.3 qt. (2.2 L, 1.9 Imp. qt.)

Gear oil type and viscosity

Use either of the following: TOYOTA Genuine MG Gear Oil special

II Other gear oil that meets API GL-3* and

SAE 75W-90 specifications

NOTICE

Manual transmission gear oil Using a manual transmission gear oil other than TOYOTA Genuine MG Gear Oil special II may cause occurrences of rattling noises while idling and poor fuel consumption. Never use different brands together.

467

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Clutch

Brakes

*1: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 110 lbf (490 N, 50 kgf) while the engine is running.

*2: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 45.0 lbf (200 N, 20.4 kgf).

Pedal free play 0.2 0.6 in. (5 15 mm)

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

Pedal clearance*1 2.16 in. (55 mm) Min.

Pedal free play 0.020 0.106 in. (0.5 2.7 mm)

Brake pad wear limit (vehicles with- out brembo brake)

Front 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)

Rear 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)

Brake pad wear limit (vehicles with brembo brake)

Front 0.05 in. (1.2 mm)

Rear 0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

Parking brake lining wear limit 0.06 in. (1.5 mm)

Parking brake lever travel*2 7 8 clicks

Fluid type SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

468

6-1. Specifications

Steering

Tires and wheels

Type A

Type B

Type C

Free play Less than 1.2 in. (30 mm)

Tire size 215/45R17 87W, T135/80D16 101M

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 17 7 J, 16 4T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

Tire size P215/45R17 87V, T135/80D16 101M

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 17 7 J, 16 4T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

Tire size 215/40R18 85Y, T145/70D17 106M

Tire inflation pressure (Recommended cold tire inflation pressure)

Front: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Rear: 35 psi (240 kPa, 2.4 kgf/cm2 or bar) Spare: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2 or bar)

Wheel size 18 7 1/2 J, 17 4T (compact spare)

Wheel nut torque 89 ftlbf (120 Nm, 12.2 kgfm)

469

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Light bulbs

A: Wedge base bulbs (clear) B: Wedge base bulbs (amber) C: Double end bulbs

Light Bulbs Bulb No. W Type

Exterior

Front side marker lights #194 3.8 A

License plate lights W5W 5 A

Back-up lights W16W 16 A

Interior Trunk light W5W 5 B

Interior light 10 C

470

6-1. Specifications

Fuel information

Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

If your engine knocks Consult your Toyota dealer. You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-

ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

The engine is designed to operate at maximum performance using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) or higher. If an octane rating of 93 (98 RON) fuel is not readily available in your area, unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) may be used with no detriment to engine durability or driveability. However, you may notice a slight decrease in maximum engine performance and you may hear some knocking (pinging) of an engine while using an octane rating of 91 (95 RON) fuel. If the octane rating is less than 91, damage to the engine may occur and may void the vehicle warranty.

471

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Gasoline quality In very few cases, driveability problems may be caused by the brand of gas- oline you are using. If driveability problems persist, try changing the brand of gasoline. If this does not correct the problem, consult your Toyota dealer.

Fuel octane rating This octane rating is the average of the Research Octane and Motor Octane numbers and is commonly referred to as the Anti Knock Index. Using a gasoline with a lower octane rating can cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can damage the engine. Do not be concerned if your vehi- cle sometimes knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when you acceler- ate. Contact your Toyota dealer if you use a fuel with the specified octane rating and your vehicle knocks heavily or persistently.

Gasoline for California-certified LEV If your vehicle was certified to Californias low emission vehicle (LEV) stan- dards as indicated on the underhood tune-up label, it is designed to optimize engine and emission performance with gasoline that meets the clean burn- ing low-sulfur California gasoline specifications. If you live in any other state than California, your vehicle will operate on gasoline meeting Federal speci- fications. Gasoline sold outside California is permitted to have higher sulfur levels, which may affect the performance of your vehicles catalytic converter and may produce a sulfur exhaust odor or smell. Toyota recommends that you try a different brand of unleaded gasoline having lower sulfur to deter- mine if the problem is fuel related before returning your vehicle to an autho- rized dealer for service.

472

6-1. Specifications

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline containing detergent additives Toyota recommends the use of gasoline that contains detergent additives

to avoid build-up of engine deposits. All gasoline sold in the U.S.A. contains minimum detergent additives to

clean and/or keep clean intake systems, per EPAs lowest additives con- centration program.

Toyota strongly recommends the use of Top Tier Detergent Gasoline. For more information on Top Tier Detergent Gasoline and a list of marketers, please go to the official website www.toptiergas.com.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline Cleaner burning gasoline, including reformulated gasoline that contains oxy- genates such as ethanol is available in many areas. Toyota recommends the use of cleaner burning gasoline and appropriately blended reformulated gasoline. These types of gasoline provide excellent vehicle performance, reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.

Non-recommendation of the use of blended gasoline

If you use gasohol in your vehicle, be sure that it has an octane rating no lower than 93.

Toyota DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline containing methanol.

Use only gasoline containing a maxi- mum of 10% ethanol. DO NOT use any flex-fuel or gasoline that could contain more than 10% etha- nol, including from any pump labeled E15, E30, E50, E85 (which are only some examples of fuel containing more than 10% ethanol).

DO NOT use gasoline containing more than 10% ethanol.

(15% ethanol)

(50% ethanol)

(85% ethanol)

473

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Toyota does not recommend gasoline containing MMT Some gasoline contains octane enhancing additive called MMT (Methylcy- clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl). Toyota DOES NOT recommend the use of gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel containing MMT is used, your emission control system may be adversely affected. The malfunction indicator lamp on the instrument cluster may come on. If this happens, contact your Toyota dealer for service.

NOTICE

Notice on fuel quality Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be

damaged. Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline can cause damage to your vehicles three-way catalytic converters causing the emission control system to malfunction.

Do not use gasohol other than the type previously stated. Other gasohol may cause fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems.

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane number or rating lower than the level previously stated may cause persistent heavy knocking. At worst, this may lead to engine damage and will void the vehicle war- ranty.

Fuel-related poor driveability If after using a different type of fuel, poor driveability is encountered (poor hot starting, vaporization, engine knocking, etc.), discontinue the use of that type of fuel.

When refueling with gasohol Take care not to spill gasohol. It can damage your vehicle's paint.

474

6-1. Specifications

Tire information

Typical tire symbols

Standard tire

Compact spare tire

Tire size (P. 477) DOT and Tire Identification Number (TIN) (P. 476) Uniform tire quality grading For details, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading that follows.

Location of treadwear indicators (P. 345)

475

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Tire ply composition and materials Plies are layers of rubber-coated parallel cords. Cords are the strands which form the plies in a tire.

Radial tires or bias-ply tires A radial tire has RADIAL on the sidewall. A tire not marked RADIAL is a bias-ply tire.

TUBELESS or TUBE TYPE A tubeless tire does not have a tube and air is directly filled in the tire. A tube type tire has a tube inside the tire and the tube main- tains the air pressure.

Load limit at maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 348) Maximum cold tire inflation pressure (P. 468) This means the pressure to which a tire may be inflated.

Summer tire or all season tire (P. 348) An all season tire has M+S on the sidewall. A tire not marked M+S is a summer tire.

TEMPORARY USE ONLY (P. 430) A compact spare tire is identified by the phrase TEMPORARY USE ONLY molded into its sidewall. This tire is designed for tem- porary emergency use only.

476

6-1. Specifications

Typical DOT and tire identification number (TIN)

Type A

DOT symbol* Tire Identification Number (TIN) Tire manufacturer's identifica- tion mark Tire size code Manufacturer's optional tire type code (3 or 4 letters) Manufacturing week Manufacturing year Manufacturer's code

*: The DOT symbol certifies that the tire conforms to applicable Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Type B

477

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Tire size

Typical tire size information The illustration indicates typical tire size.

Tire use (P = Passenger car, T = Temporary use) Section width (millimeters) Aspect ratio (tire height to section width) Tire construction code (R = Radial, D = Diagonal) Wheel diameter (inches) Load index (2 or 3 digits) Speed symbol (alphabet with one letter)

Tire dimensions Section width Tire height Wheel diameter

478

6-1. Specifications

Tire section names

Bead Sidewall Shoulder Tread Belt Inner liner Reinforcing rubber Carcass Rim lines Bead wires Chafer

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

This information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration of the U.S. Department of Transportation. It provides the purchasers and/or prospective purchasers of Toyota vehicles with information on uniform tire quality grading.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer any questions you may have as you read this information.

DOT quality grades All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.

For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A

479

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a speci- fied government test course.

For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1 - 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use. Performance may differ significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C, and they represent the tires ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering (turn- ing) traction.

Temperature A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, represent- ing the tires resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a speci- fied indoor laboratory test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the labo- ratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

480

6-1. Specifications

Warning: The temperature grades of a tire assume that it is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either sepa- rately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire fail- ure.

Glossary of tire terminology

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire pressure when the vehicle has been parked for three hours or more, or has not been driven more than 1 mile or 1.5 km under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflated pressure to which a tire may be inflated, shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer.

Accessory weight

The combined weight (in excess of those stan- dard items which may be replaced) of auto- matic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, radio and heater, to the extent that these items are available as factory-installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment, including the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, and if so equipped, air conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

The sum of: (a) Curb weight (b) Accessory weight (c) Vehicle capacity weight (d) Production options weight

481

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Tire related term Meaning

Normal occupant weight

150 lb. (68 kg) times the number of occupants specified in the second column of Table 1* that follows

Occupant distribution Distribution of occupants in a vehicle as speci- fied in the third column of Table 1* below

Production options weight

The combined weight of installed regular pro- duction options weighing over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the standard items which they replace, not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim

Rim A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) Nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation Rim diameter and width

Rim type designation The industry manufacturers designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width Nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight (Total load capacity)

The rated cargo and luggage load plus 150 lb. (68 kg) times the vehicles designated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight, and dividing by two

482

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term Meaning

Vehicle normal load on the tire

The load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle its share of curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occu- pant weight (distributed in accordance with Table 1* below), and dividing by two

Weather side The surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead The part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

Bead separation A breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the cen- terline of the tread

Carcass The tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears the load

Chunking The breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord The strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation The parting of cords from adjacent rubber com- pounds

Cracking Any parting within the tread, sidewall, or inner- liner of the tire extending to cord material

CT

A pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges inside the air cavity of the tire

483

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

Tire related term Meaning

Extra load tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corre- sponding standard tire

Groove The space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner The layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflating medium within the tire

Innerliner separation The parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(a)The sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (b)The outward facing sidewall of an asymmet- rical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehi- cle

Light truck (LT) tire A tire designated by its manufacturer as pri- marily intended for use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating The maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating The load rating for a tire at the maximum per- missible inflation pressure for that tire

Maximum permissible inflation pressure

The maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice Any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord material

Outer diameter The overall diameter of an inflated new tire

484

6-1. Specifications

Tire related term Meaning

Overall width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, including eleva- tions due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

Passenger car tire

A tire intended for use on passenger cars, mul- tipurpose passenger vehicles, and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or less.

Ply A layer of rubber-coated parallel cords

Ply separation A parting of rubber compound between adja- cent plies

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber, chemi- cals, fabric and steel or other materials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, pro- vides the traction and contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire A tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures than the corre- sponding standard tire

Section width

The linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire, excluding ele- vations due to labeling, decoration, or protec- tive bands

Sidewall That portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation The parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

485

6-1. Specifications

6

Vehicle specifications

*: Table 1 Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Tire related term Meaning

Snow tire

A tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to the ASTM E- 1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction test as described in ASTM F-1805-00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow-and Ice-Covered Surfaces, and which

is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

Test rim The rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropriate for use with that tire

Tread That portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib A tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation Pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI)

The projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel-holding fixture The fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

486

6-1. Specifications

Designated seating capacity, Number of

occupants

Vehicle normal load, Number of occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally loaded

vehicle

2 through 4 2 2 in front

5 through 10 3 2 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15 5 2 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third seat, 1

in fourth seat

16 through 22 7 2 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third seat, 1

in fourth seat

487

6

Vehicle specifications

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Item Function Default setting Customized setting

Smart key system (P. 25)

Smart key system On Off

Operation signal (Emergency flashers) On Off

Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off

Operation buzzer vol- ume Level 5 Level 0 to 7

Number of permissible times of continuous smart lock

Twice Unlimited

Trunk unlocking func- tion On Off

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per- sonalized to your preferences. Programming these preferences requires specialized equipment and may be performed by your Toyota dealer.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions being customized. Contact your Toyota dealer.

488

6-2. Customization

Wireless remote con- trol (P. 38)

Unlocking operation

Driver's door unlocked in one step, both side doors unlocked in two steps

Both side doors unlocked in one step

Automatic door lock function to be activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

On Off

Time elapsed before automatic door lock function is activated if door is not opened after being unlocked

60 seconds

30 seconds

120 seconds

Operation signal (Emergency flashers) On Off

Operation signal (Buzzer) On Off

Operation buzzer vol- ume Level 5 Level 0 to 7

Door lock buzzer On Off

Trunk unlocking opera- tion

Push and hold (short)

Push and hold (long)

One short push

Two short pushes

Panic function On Off

Vehicle finder function Off On

Item Function Default setting Customized setting

489

6-2. Customization

6

Vehicle specifications

Alarm (P. 82)

Operation when doors are unlocked using the mechanical key (vehi- cles with a smart key system)

Off On

Automatic light control system (P. 222)

Light sensor sensitivity 0% -40% to +40%

Time elapsed before headlights automati- cally turn off after doors are closed

30 seconds

0 second

60 seconds

90 seconds

Rear window defogger (P. 284)

Time elapsed before the rear window defog- ger turn off (vehicles with an automatic air conditioning system)

15 minutes Continue

Illumination (P. 289)

Time elapsed before lights turn off 15 seconds

7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation when the doors are unlocked On Off

Operation after the engine switch is turned off

On Off

Interior light illumination upon approach (vehi- cles with a smart key system)

On Off

Interior light illumination On Off

Item Function Default setting Customized setting

490

6-2. Customization

For owners 7

491

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners .............. 492

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ..................... 493

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French) ..................... 496

492

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. (Toll-free: 1-800-331-4331).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA can- not become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, S.E., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

493

7

For ow ners

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

Utilisation correcte des ceintures de scurit

Droulez la sangle diagonale de telle sorte qu'elle passe bien sur l'paule, sans pour autant tre en contact avec le cou ou glisser de l'paule.

Placez la sangle abdominale le plus bas possible sur les hanches.

Rglez la position du dossier de sige. Asseyez-vous le dos droit et calez-vous bien dans le sige.

Ne vrillez pas la ceinture de scurit.

The following is a French explanation of seat belt instructions extracted from the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more detailed seat belt instructions in English.

494

Guide de ceinture de scurit avant

Pour faciliter le droulage de la ceinture de scurit, passez-la dans le guide.

Lorsque vous accdez aux siges arrire ou en descendez, sortez la ceinture de scurit de son guide.

495

7

For ow ners

Entretien et soin

Ceintures de scurit Nettoyez avec un chiffon ou une ponge humidifis avec de l'eau savonneuse tide. Vrifiez rgulirement que les ceintures ne sont pas uses, effiloches ou entailles excessivement.

ATTENTION

Dtrioration et usure des ceintures de scurit N'abmez pas les ceintures de scurit en coinant la sangle, le pne ou la

boucle dans la porte.

Inspectez le systme de ceintures de scurit rgulirement. Contrlez l'absence de coupures, d'effilochages et de pices desserres. Remplacez immdiatement toute ceinture de scurit endommage. Une ceinture de scurit endommage ne permet pas de protger un occupant de blessures graves ou mortelles.

Vrifiez que la ceinture et le pne sont verrouills et que la ceinture n'est pas vrille. Si la ceinture de scurit ne fonctionne pas correctement, contactez immdiatement votre concessionnaire Toyota.

Remplacez l'ensemble de sige, y compris les sangles, si votre vhicule a t impliqu dans un accident grave, mme en l'absence de dommage visible.

N'essayez pas d'installer, de retirer, de modifier, de dmonter ou de mettre au rebut les ceintures de scurit. Faites effectuer les rparations ncessaires par votre concessionnaire Toyota. Une mauvaise manipulation du prtensionneur peut en altrer le fonctionnement, et occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

496

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners (in French)

The following is a French explanation of SRS airbag instructions extracted from the SRS airbag section in this manual.

See the SRS airbag section for more detailed SRS airbag instructions in English.

Modles quips de coussins gonflables SRS et de ceintures de scurit pour le conducteur, le passager avant et les passagers arrire Votre vhicule est quip d'un systme de retenue supplmentaire, en plus de la ceinture de scurit, chacun des siges avant et chacun des siges arrire. Le systme de retenue supplmentaire (SRS) se compose de six coussins gonflables. Les configurations sont les suivantes.

497

7

For ow ners

Coussins gonflables frontaux du conducteur et du passager avant Coussins gonflables latraux du conducteur et du passager avant Coussins gonflables rideaux (pour le conducteur, le passager avant et les passagers arrire)

Ces coussins gonflables SRS ne sont conus que comme complments la protection premire fournie par les ceintures de scurit. Le systme commande galement les prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit avant. Pour les instructions d'utilisation et les prcautions relatives au prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit, reportez-vous Prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit.

498

ATTENTION

Coussin gonflable SRS Afin de garantir la meilleure protection possible dans l'ventualit d'un

accident, le conducteur et tous les passagers du vhicule doivent toujours porter leur ceinture de scurit lors de la conduite du vhicule. Les coussins gonflables SRS ne sont conus que comme complments la protection premire fournie par les ceintures de scurit. Ils ne dispensent pas de la ncessit du port des ceintures de scurit. Ils offrent la meilleure protection combine, en complment du port des ceintures de scurit, en cas d'accident grave.

Ne pas porter la ceinture de scurit augmente les risques de blessures graves ou mortelles lors d'un accident, mme lorsque le vhicule est quip de coussins gonflables SRS.

Pour les instructions d'utilisation et les prcautions prendre au sujet du systme de ceintures de scurit, reportez-vous Ceintures de scurit.

Ne vous asseyez pas et ne vous penchez pas inutilement prs des coussins gonflables SRS. Parce que les coussins gonflables SRS se dploient une vitesse considrable - plus vite que le clignement de vos yeux - et avec une puissance conue pour protger des collisions haute vitesse, la puissance de dploiement d'un coussin gonflable peut blesser un occupant dont le corps en est trop proche.

Il est galement important de porter votre ceinture de scurit pour prvenir les blessures qui peuvent survenir lorsque le coussin gonflable SRS entre en contact avec un occupant qui ne serait pas assis dans la position adquate, tel qu'un occupant qui aurait t projet vers l'avant lors du freinage qui prcde l'accident.

Mme en tant correctement positionn, il n'est pas impossible que l'occupant subisse des blessures mineures, telles que des brlures et des ecchymoses sur le visage ou les bras, en raison de la puissance de dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS.

499

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

Coussin gonflable SRS Les coussins gonflables SRS se dploient une vitesse et avec une

puissance considrables. Les occupants qui sont mal installs lorsque le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie peuvent subir des blessures trs graves. Parce que le coussin gonflable SRS a besoin d'un espace suffisant pour son dploiement, le conducteur doit toujours se tenir droit et bien enfonc dans le sige, le plus loin possible du volant, tout en conservant le contrle complet du vhicule, et le passager avant doit dplacer son sige vers l'arrire aussi loin que possible, se tenir droit et bien en arrire dans le sige.

Ne placez pas d'objets au-dessus ou proximit du cache du coussin gonflable SRS ou entre vous et le coussin gonflable SRS. En cas de dploiement du coussin gonflable SRS, ces objets pourraient interfrer avec son fonctionnement correct et pourraient tre propulss l'intrieur du vhicule et causer des blessures.

500

ATTENTION

Coussin gonflable SRS

Placez les enfants de 12 ans et moins sur le sige arrire, correctement attachs tout moment. Le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie une vitesse et avec une force considrables et peut blesser ou mme tuer des enfants, particulirement s'ils ont 12 ans ou moins, surtout s'ils ne sont pas ou mal attachs. Parce que les enfants sont plus lgers et plus faibles que les adultes, le risque qu'ils courent d'tre blesss par le dploiement est plus grand. Pour cette raison, nous recommandons fortement que TOUS les enfants (y compris les enfants installs dans des siges enfants et ceux qui sont trop grands pour les siges de scurit enfants) s'assoient sur le sige ARRIRE et soient correctement attachs dans un sige de scurit enfant ou avec une ceinture de scurit, selon le dispositif adapt pour l'ge, la taille et le poids de l'enfant. Attachez TOUS les types de siges enfant (y compris les siges enfants de type face la route) sur les siges ARRIRE, en toutes circonstances. Les statistiques relatives aux accidents prouvent que les enfants sont mieux protgs lorsqu'ils sont attachs correctement l'arrire plutt qu' l'avant. Pour les instructions d'utilisation et les prcautions prendre au sujet des siges de scurit enfant, reportez- vous Siges de scurit enfant.

501

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

Coussin gonflable SRS N'INSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIGE ENFANT DE TYPE DOS LA ROUTE

SUR LE SIGE AVANT. NGLIGER CECI REVIENT FAIRE COURIR LE RISQUE L'ENFANT DE SUBIR DE GRAVES BLESSURES, VOIRE LA MORT, EN PLAANT LA TTE DE L'ENFANT TROP PRS DES COUSSINS GONFLABLES SRS.

Ne laissez jamais un enfant se tenir debout ou genoux sur le sige du passager avant et ne tenez jamais un enfant sur vos genoux ou dans vos bras. Le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie avec une force considrable et peut blesser ou tuer l'enfant.

Lorsque le coussin gonflable SRS se dploie, un peu de fume est relche. Cette fume peut causer des problmes respiratoires pour les personnes ayant des antcdents d'asthme ou des difficults respirer. Si vous ou vos passagers prouvez une difficult respirer aprs le dploiement du coussin gonflable SRS, prenez ou faites-leur prendre l'air rapidement.

Un coussin gonflable SRS qui se dploie libre un gaz chaud. Les occupants pourraient se brler s'ils entrent en contact direct avec le gaz chaud.

502

Composants du systme de coussins gonflables SRS

Capteur secondaire avant (ct droit) Tmoin d'avertissement SRS Module du coussin gonflable frontal (ct conducteur) ( deux tapes) Tmoin ON et OFF du coussin gonflable frontal du passager avant (au centre du tableau de bord) Module du coussin gonflable frontal (ct passager avant) ( deux tapes) Module de commande de dtection de l'occupant du sige passager avant

Capteur d'impact de porte (ct droit) Module de coussin gonflable rideau (ct droit) Cblage des coussins gonflables Module de coussin gonflable latral (ct passager avant) Capteur de coussin gonflable latral (ct droit du montant central) Capteur de coussin gonflable rideau (ct droit du passage de roue arrire) Prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit (ct passager avant)

503

7

For ow ners

Capteur satellite de scurit (sous le centre des siges arrire) Capteur du systme de classification de l'occupant du sige passager avant Contact de boucle de ceinture de scurit (ct passager avant) Prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit (ct conducteur) Capteur de coussin gonflable rideau (ct gauche du passage de roue arrire) Capteur de coussin gonflable latral (ct gauche du montant central)

Module de coussin gonflable latral (ct conducteur) Capteur d'impact de porte (ct gauche) Module de commande de coussin gonflable (y compris capteurs d'impact et capteurs de retournement) Capteur secondaire avant (ct gauche) Module de coussin gonflable rideau (ct gauche)

504

Votre vhicule est quip de COUSSINS GONFLABLES INTELLIGENTS conus selon les normes de scurit amricaines applicables aux vhicules moteur (FMVSS208). Le systme de coussins gonflables contrle la puissance de dploiement des coussins gonflables pour le conducteur et le passager avant. Le systme de coussins gonflables passager avant comprend le module de contrle de dtection des occupants du sige passager avant, etc.

Les principaux lments du systme de coussins gonflables SRS sont indiqus ci-dessus. Le systme de coussins gonflables SRS est command par le module de contrle des coussins gonflables. Le module de contrle des coussins gonflables consiste en un capteur de coussins gonflables.

Lorsque la violence du choc frontal ou latral l'exige, le systme de coussins gonflables SRS dclenche les dispositifs de gonflage des coussins gonflables. Une raction chimique dans les dispositifs pyrotechniques permet de dployer rapidement les coussins gonflables avec un gaz inoffensif permettant d'amortir le mouvement des occupants.

505

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

En cas de dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS Ne touchez pas les composants du systme de coussins gonflables SRS au niveau du volant et du tableau de bord mains nues juste aprs le dploiement. Cela peut causer des brlures car les composants peuvent tre trs chauds la suite du dploiement.

Prcautions relatives aux siges de scurit enfant N'INSTALLEZ JAMAIS UN SIGE ENFANT TYPE DOS LA ROUTE SUR LE SIGE PASSAGER AVANT MME SI LE COUSSIN GONFLABLE FRONTAL DU PASSAGER AVANT SRS EST DSACTIV. Veillez l'installer correctement sur le sige ARRIRE. De mme, il est fortement recommand que tout sige enfant type face la route ou sige rehausseur soit install sur le sige ARRIRE, et que mme les enfants trop grands pour utiliser un sige de scurit enfant s'assoient sur le sige ARRIRE. En effet, les enfants assis sur le sige passager avant peuvent tre tus ou blesss gravement si le coussin gonflable frontal du passager avant SRS se dploie. Les siges ARRIRE sont les places les plus sres pour les enfants.

506

Coussin gonflable latral SRS et coussin gonflable rideau SRS

Le coussin gonflable latral SRS est log dans le ct porte de chaque dossier de sige avant, qui porte une tiquette SRS AIRBAG.

Lors d'une collision latrale modre svre, le coussin gonflable latral SRS, situ du ct o le vhicule est percut, se dploie entre l'occupant et le panneau de porte, et intervient en complment de la ceinture de scurit, en rduisant l'impact sur la poitrine et la taille de l'occupant. Le coussin gonflable latral SRS fonctionne uniquement pour les occupants des siges avant.

Le coussin gonflable rideau SRS situ de chaque ct de l'habitacle est log du ct toit (entre le montant avant et un point au-dessus du sige arrire). Une inscription SRS AIRBAG est situe en haut de chaque montant avant et arrire. Lors d'une collision latrale modre svre, le coussin gonflable rideau SRS, situ du ct o le vhicule est percut, se dploie entre l'occupant et la vitre latrale et intervient en complment de la ceinture de scurit, en rduisant l'impact sur la tte de l'occupant.

507

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

En cas de dploiement des coussins gonflables SRS Ne touchez pas les composants du systme de coussins gonflables SRS situs au niveau du dossier du sige avant mains nues juste aprs le dploiement. Cela peut causer des brlures car les composants peuvent tre trs chauds la suite du dploiement.

Aprs le dploiement, ne touchez aucune partie du systme de coussin gonflable rideau SRS (entre le montant avant et un point situ au-dessus du sige arrire, ct toit). Cela peut causer des brlures car les composants peuvent tre trs chauds la suite du dploiement.

Prcautions relatives au coussin gonflable latral SRS et au coussin gonflable rideau SRS Le coussin gonflable latral SRS et le coussin gonflable rideau SRS ne sont conus que comme complments la protection premire fournie par la ceinture de scurit. Ils ne suppriment en aucun cas la ncessit du port des ceintures de scurit. Il est galement important de porter votre ceinture de scurit pour prvenir les blessures qui peuvent survenir lorsqu'un occupant n'est pas assis dans une position droite correcte.

508

ATTENTION

Prcautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS Respectez les prcautions suivantes concernant les coussins gonflables SRS. Le non-respect de ces prcautions peut occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

Le conducteur et tous les passagers du vhicule doivent porter correctement leur ceinture de scurit. Les coussins gonflables SRS sont des dispositifs supplmentaires utiliser avec les ceintures de scurit.

Le coussin gonflable conducteur SRS se dploie avec une force considrable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le conducteur se trouve trs prs du coussin gonflable. L'autorit fdrale charge de la scurit routire aux tats-Unis (NHTSA) conseille:

La zone risque du coussin gonflable conducteur se situant dans les premiers 2 3 in. (50 75 mm) de dploiement, vous placer 10 in. (250 mm) de votre coussin gonflable conducteur vous garantit une marge de scurit suffisante. Cette distance est mesurer entre le centre du volant et le sternum. Si vous tes assis moins de 10 in. (250 mm), vous pouvez changer votre position de conduite de plusieurs faons:

Reculez votre sige le plus possible, de manire pouvoir encore atteindre confortablement les pdales.

Inclinez lgrement le dossier du sige. Bien que les vhicules aient une conception diffrente, un grand nombre de conducteurs peuvent s'asseoir une distance de 10 in. (250 mm), mme avec le sige conducteur compltement avanc, simplement en inclinant un peu le dossier de sige. Si vous avez des difficults voir la route aprs avoir inclin le dossier de votre sige, utilisez un coussin ferme et antidrapant pour vous rehausser ou remontez le sige si votre vhicule est quip de cette fonction.

Si votre volant est rglable, inclinez-le vers le bas. Cela a pour effet d'orienter le coussin gonflable en direction de votre poitrine plutt que de votre tte et de votre cou.

Rglez votre sige selon les recommandations de la NHTSA ci-dessus, tout en conservant le contrle des pdales, du volant et la vue des commandes du tableau de bord.

509

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

Prcautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS Le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS se dploie galement avec une

force considrable, pouvant occasionner des blessures graves, voire mortelles, si le passager avant se trouve trs prs du coussin gonflable. Le sige du passager avant doit tre loign le plus possible du coussin gonflable en rglant le dossier de sige de faon ce que le passager avant soit assis bien droit dans le sige.

Les nourrissons et les enfants qui ne sont pas correctement assis et/ou attachs peuvent tre grivement blesss ou tus par le dploiement d'un coussin gonflable. Un nourrisson ou un enfant trop petit pour utiliser une ceinture de scurit doit tre correctement attach au moyen d'un sige de scurit enfant. Toyota recommande vivement d'installer tous les nourrissons et enfants sur les siges arrire du vhicule et de prvoir pour eux des systmes de retenue adapts. Les siges arrire sont plus srs pour les nourrissons et les enfants que le sige du passager avant.

Ne vous asseyez pas sur le bord du sige et ne vous appuyez pas contre la planche de bord.

510

ATTENTION

Prcautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

Ne laissez pas un enfant rester debout devant le coussin gonflable passager avant SRS ou s'asseoir sur les genoux du passager avant.

Ne laissez pas les occupants des siges avant voyager avec un objet sur les genoux.

Ne vous appuyez pas contre la porte, le rail latral de toit ou les montants avant, latraux et arrire.

Ne laissez personne s'agenouiller sur le sige passager en appui contre la porte ou sortir la tte ou les mains l'extrieur du vhicule.

511

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

Prcautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS

N'utilisez aucun accessoire de sige recouvrant les zones de dploiement des coussins gonflables latraux SRS, car il risque de gner le dploiement des coussins gonflables. De tels accessoires peuvent empcher les coussins gonflables latraux de fonctionner correctement, dsactiver le systme ou entraner le dploiement accidentel des coussins gonflables latraux, occasionnant des blessures graves, voire mortelles.

Ne fixez rien et ne posez rien sur des emplacements tels que la planche de bord ou la garniture du volant. Ces objets peuvent se transformer en projectiles lorsque les coussins gonflables conducteur et passager avant SRS se dploient.

Ne fixez rien aux portes, la vitre de pare-brise, aux vitres latrales, aux vitres de custode arrire, aux montants avant et arrire ou aux rails latraux de toit.

512

ATTENTION

Prcautions relatives aux coussins gonflables SRS vitez de faire subir des chocs ou des pressions excessives aux parties

renfermant les composants de coussins gonflables SRS ( P. 502). En effet, cela pourrait entraner un dysfonctionnement des coussins gonflables SRS.

Ne touchez aucun composant immdiatement aprs le dploiement (gonflage) des coussins gonflables SRS, car ils peuvent tre chauds.

Si vous avez des difficults respirer aprs le dploiement du coussin gonflable SRS, ouvrez une porte ou une vitre pour faire entrer de l'air frais, ou bien descendez du vhicule si cela ne prsente pas de danger. Essuyez tout rsidu ds que possible afin d'viter d'ventuelles irritations de la peau.

Si les parties renfermant les coussins gonflables SRS, comme les garnitures du volant et des montants avant et arrire, sont endommages ou craqueles, faites-les remplacer par votre concessionnaire Toyota.

513

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

Modification et mise au rebut des composants du systme de coussins gonflables SRS Ne mettez pas votre vhicule au rebut et ne procdez aucune des modifications suivantes sans consulter votre concessionnaire Toyota. Les coussins gonflables SRS peuvent ne pas fonctionner correctement ou se dployer (se gonfler) accidentellement, provoquant la mort ou de graves blessures.

Installation, dpose, dmontage et rparation des coussins gonflables SRS.

Rparations, modifications, dmontage ou remplacement du volant, du tableau de bord, de la planche de bord, des siges ou de leur garnissage, des montants avant, latraux et arrire ou des rails latraux de toit.

Rparations ou modifications des ailes avant, du pare-chocs avant ou des flancs de l'habitacle.

Installation d'un protge-calandre (pare-buffle, pare-kangourou, etc.), de chasse-neige, de treuils.

Modifications du systme de suspension du vhicule.

Installation d'appareils lectroniques tels que les metteurs/rcepteurs radios mobiles et les lecteurs CD.

Modifications de votre vhicule pour une personne atteinte d'un handicap physique.

514

Moniteurs du systme de coussins gonflables SRS

Lors de la conduite du vhicule, un systme de diagnostic surveille continuellement la disponibilit du systme de coussins gonflables SRS (y compris les prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit avant). Le tmoin d'avertissement SRS indique le fonctionnement normal du systme en s'allumant pendant environ 6 secondes lorsque vous placez le contact du moteur en position ON (vhicules sans systme d'accs et de dmarrage mains libres), ou lorsque le contact ENGINE START STOP est plac en mode IGNITION ON (vhicules avec systme d'accs et de dmarrage mains libres).

Vhicules avec cran multifonctionnel monochrome

Vhicules avec cran multifonctionnel couleurs

515

7

For ow ners

Les composants suivants sont contrls par le tmoin:

Capteur secondaire avant (ct droit)

Capteur secondaire avant (ct gauche)

Module de commande de coussin gonflable (y compris capteurs d'impact et capteurs de retournement)

Module de coussin gonflable frontal (ct conducteur)

Module de coussin gonflable frontal (ct passager avant)

Capteur de coussin gonflable latral (ct droit du montant central)

Capteur de coussin gonflable latral (ct gauche du montant central)

Capteur d'impact de porte (ct droit)

Capteur d'impact de porte (ct gauche)

Module de coussin gonflable latral (ct conducteur)

Module de coussin gonflable latral (ct passager avant)

516

Capteur de coussin gonflable rideau (ct droit du passage de roue arrire)

Capteur de coussin gonflable rideau (ct gauche du passage de roue arrire)

Module de coussin gonflable rideau (ct droit)

Module de coussin gonflable rideau (ct gauche)

Capteur satellite de scurit (sous le centre des siges arrire)

Prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit (ct conducteur)

Prtensionneur de ceinture de scurit (ct passager avant)

Contact de boucle de ceinture de scurit (ct passager avant)

Capteur du systme de classification de l'occupant du sige passager avant

Module de commande de dtection de l'occupant du sige passager avant

Tmoin ON et OFF du coussin gonflable frontal du passager avant

Tous les cblages associs

517

7

For ow ners

ATTENTION

Tmoin d'avertissement SRS Si le tmoin d'avertissement montre l'un des tats suivants, il peut y avoir un dysfonctionnement des prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit, du systme de coussins gonflables SRS et/ou du systme de classification de l'occupant du sige passager avant. Amenez immdiatement votre vhicule chez votre concessionnaire Toyota le plus proche afin de faire vrifier le systme. Sans vrification et rparation adaptes, les prtensionneurs de ceintures de scurit, le systme de coussins gonflables SRS et/ou le systme de classification de l'occupant du sige passager avant ne fonctionneront pas correctement en cas de collision, ce qui pourrait augmenter les risques de blessures graves, voire mortelles.

Clignotement du tmoin d'avertissement

Le tmoin ne s'allume pas lorsque le contact du moteur est d'abord plac sur la position ON (vhicules sans systme d'accs et de dmarrage mains libres), ou que le contact ENGINE START STOP est plac en mode IGNITION ON (vhicules avec systme d'accs et de dmarrage mains libres).

Le tmoin d'avertissement reste allum en permanence

Le tmoin d'avertissement s'allume pendant la conduite

518

Index

519

Abbreviation list ..................... 520

Alphabetical index.................. 521

What to do if... ........................ 529

520

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

ACC Accessory

AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift

ALR Automatic Locking Retractor

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

ECU Electronic Control Unit

EDR Event Data Recorder

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

EPS Electric Power Steering

GAWR Gross Axle Weight Ratings

GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

I/M Emission inspection and maintenance

LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children

LED Light Emitting Diode

LSD Limited Slip Differential

M + S Mud and Snow

MMT Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl

OBD On Board Diagnostics

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TIN Tire Identification Number

TPMS Tire Pressure Warning System

TRAC Traction Control

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

521

Alphabetical index

Alphabetical index

A/C.................................... 268, 275 ABS........................................... 245 Air conditioning filter.............. 360 Air conditioning system

Air conditioning filter ............. 360 Automatic air conditioning

system................................ 275 Manual air conditioning

system................................ 268 Airbags

Airbag operating conditions................... 103, 111

Airbag precautions for your child............................ 120

Airbag warning light.............. 398 Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions........... 111 Curtain shield airbag

precautions ........................ 120 Front passenger occupant

classification system .......... 128 General airbag

precautions ........................ 120 Locations of airbags ............... 89 Modification and

disposal of airbags............. 124 Proper driving

posture ......................... 87, 120 Side airbag operating

conditions........................... 111 Side airbag

precautions ........................ 120 Side and curtain shield

airbags operating conditions........................... 111

Side and curtain shield airbags precautions............ 120

SRS airbag instructions for Canadian owners ............... 496

SRS airbags ........................... 89

Alarm...........................................82 Anti-lock brake system............245 Audio input ...............................286 Audio system

Audio input ............................286 AUX port................................286 iPod.......................................286 Portable music player............286 Steering wheel audio

switches ..............................287 USB memory.........................286 USB port................................286

Automatic air conditioning system ....................................275

Automatic headlight leveling system ....................................226

Automatic light control system ....................................222

Automatic transmission Automatic transmission .........178 If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P......................439 Manual mode ........................181 Mode select switch................180 Paddle shift switches.............181

AUX port ...................................286

Back-up lights Replacing light bulbs .............375 Wattage.................................469

Battery Checking ...............................339 If the vehicle has a

discharged battery ..............445 Preparing and checking

before winter .......................261 Bottle holders...........................293 Brake

Fluid ......................................337 Parking brake ........................189

A

B

522

Alphabetical index

Brake assist..............................245 Break-in tips .............................155 Brightness control

Instrument panel light control .................................192

Care Alcantara.............................316 Aluminum wheels ..................309 Exterior..................................308 Interior ...................................312 Seat belts ..............................313

Cargo capacity .........................256 Chains.......................................263 Child restraint system

Booster seats, definition .............................137

Booster seats, installation...........................141

Convertible seats, definition .............................137

Convertible seats, installation...........................141

Front passenger occupant classification system...........128

Infant seats, definition .............................137

Infant seats, installation...........................141

Installing CRS with LATCH anchors ..................142

Installing CRS with seat belts ............................144

Installing CRS with top tether straps..................147

Child safety Airbag precautions ................120 Battery precautions .......342, 448 Child restraint system ...........137 How your child should

wear the seat belt .................62 Installing child restraints........141 Power window lock switch ......72 Power window

precautions ...........................74 Removed key battery

precautions .........................365 Seat belt guide ........................61 Seat belt precautions ..............64 Seat heater precautions........302 Trunk precautions ...................49

Cleaning Alcantara.............................316 Aluminum wheels..................309 Exterior..................................308 Interior...................................312 Seat belts ..............................313

Clock.........................................298 Condenser ................................337 Console tray .............................294 Coolant

Capacity ................................464 Checking ...............................335

Cooling system Engine overheating ...............450

Cruise control ..........................232 Cup holders..............................294 Curtain shield airbags...............89 Customizable features ............487

Daytime running light system....................................224

Defogger Rear window .........................284 Side mirror ............................284

C

D

523

Alphabetical index

Dimension................................ 458 Dinghy towing ......................... 266 Display

Drive information .................. 210 Multi-information

display........................ 200, 207 Trip information ............ 202, 208 Warning messages............... 408

Do-it-yourself maintenance.... 324 Doors

Door lock .................... 25, 38, 43 Door windows......................... 72 Side mirrors ............................ 69

Driver's seat belt reminder light........................ 400

Driving Break-in tips ......................... 155 Correct posture....................... 87 Procedures ........................... 152 Winter drive tips.................... 261

Electric power steering........... 245 Electronic key

If the electronic key does not operate properly........... 441

Emergency flashers Switch................................... 384

Emergency, in case of If the electronic key does

not operate properly........... 441 If the engine will not start...... 436 If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P................ 439 If the vehicle has a

discharged battery ............. 445 If the warning buzzer

sounds ............................... 396 If the warning light

turns on.............................. 396

If the warning message is displayed .........................408

If you have a flat tire .............425 If you lose your keys .............440 If you think something is

wrong..................................394 If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................453 If your vehicle has to be

stopped in an emergency ..........................455

If your vehicle needs to be towed .............................386

If your vehicle overheats .......450 Engine

Compartment ........................331 Engine switch ................166, 175 Hood......................................327 How to start the

engine .........................166, 175 Identification number.............459 If the engine will not start ......436 Ignition switch................166, 175 Overheating...........................450

Engine coolant Capacity ................................464 Checking ...............................335

Engine coolant temperature gauge......................................191

Engine immobilizer system.......79 Engine oil

Capacity ................................462 Checking ...............................332 Preparing and checking

before winter .......................261 Engine switch...................166, 175 Engine switch light ..................289 EPS............................................245 Event data recorder ...................18

E

524

Alphabetical index

Floor mat...................................303 Fluid

Brake.....................................337 Washer..................................343

Fog lights Switch....................................228

Front fog lights Switch....................................228

Front passenger occupant classification system ............128

Front passenger's seat belt reminder light.........................400

Front seats Adjustment ..............................53

Front side marker light Replacing light bulbs .............375 Wattage.................................469

Front turn signal lights Switch....................................188

Fuel Capacity ................................461 Fuel gauge ............................191 Fuel pump shut off system....395 Gas station information .........532 Information ............................470 Refueling .................................75

Fuel door.....................................75 Fuel filler door ............................75 Fuel pump shut off system .....395 Fuses.........................................367

Gauges......................................191 Glove box..................................292

Hazard lights Switch ...................................384

Head restraints Adjusting ................................58

Headlights Automatic headlight

leveling ...............................226 Switch ...................................222

Heaters Seat heaters..........................301 Side mirror ............................284

Hill-start assist control............252 Hood..........................................327 Horn ..........................................190

I/M test ......................................323 Identification

Engine...................................459 Vehicle ..................................459

Ignition switch..................166, 175 Ignition switch light

Ignition switch light................289 Illuminated entry system.........289 Immobilizer system ...................79 Indicator lights .........................194 Inside rear view mirror ..............68 Interior light

Interior light ...........................290 Switch ...................................290 Wattage.................................469

Jack Positioning a floor jack ..........329 Vehicle-equipped

jack .....................................425 Jack handle ..............................425 Jam protection function

Power windows.......................73

F

G

H

I

J

525

Alphabetical index

Keyless entry............................. 38 Keys

Electronic key ......................... 22 Engine switch ............... 166, 175 If you lose your keys............. 440 If your electronic key

battery is discharged.......... 441 Key number ............................ 22 Keyless entry.......................... 38 Keys ....................................... 22 Mechanical key....................... 23 Wireless remote

control key............................ 38

Language (multi-information display) .................................. 217

License plate lights Replacing light bulbs ............ 375 Wattage................................ 469

Light bulbs Replacing ............................. 375 Wattage................................ 469

Lights Emergency flasher switch .... 384 Engine switch light................ 289 Fog light switch..................... 228 Hazard light switch ............... 384 Headlights switch ................. 222 Interior light switch................ 290 Replacing light bulbs ............ 375 Trunk light............................... 48 Turn signal lever................... 188 Wattage................................ 469

Load capacity .......................... 260

Maintenance Do-it-yourself

maintenance ...................... 324 General maintenance........... 320 Maintenance data................. 458 Maintenance requirements... 318

Manual air conditioning system ....................................268

Manual transmission ...............185 Meter

Indicators...............................194 Instrument panel

light control .........................192 Meters ...................................191 Multi-information

display.........................200, 207 Settings .........................200, 217 Warning lights .......................396 Warning messages ...............408

Microphone...............................288 Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror.............68 Side mirror heater .................284 Side mirrors.............................69 Vanity mirrors ........................297

Multi-information display Drive information ...................210 G-force display ......................212 Language ..............................217 Multi-information

display.........................200, 207 Settings .................................217 Trip information .............202, 208 Warning messages ...............408

Noise from under vehicle ..........15

Odometer ..................................191 Oil

Engine oil ..............................332 Opener

Fuel filler door .........................75 Hood......................................327 Trunk .......................................46

Outside rear view mirrors Adjusting and folding...............69

K

L

M

N

O

526

Alphabetical index

Outside temperature display ............................200, 219

Overheating, Engine ................450

Paddle shift switches ..............181 Parking brake ...........................189 Parking lights

Switch....................................222 Power outlets ...........................299 Power windows..........................72

Radiator ....................................337 Rear seats...................................56 Rear side marker lights

Switch....................................222 Rear turn signal lights

Switch....................................188 Rear view mirror

Inside rear view mirror.............68 Outside rear view mirrors ........69

Rear view monitor system ......237 Rear window defogger ............284 Replacing

Fuses ....................................367 Key battery ............................363 Light bulbs.............................375 Tires ......................................425

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners ......................492

REV indicator ...........................156

Seat belts Adjusting the seat belt.............60 Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR).....................62 Child restraint system

installation...........................141 Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts ......................313

Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) ....................62

How to wear your seat belt .....60 How your child should

wear the seat belt .................62 Pregnant women,

proper seat belt use..............64 Reminder light.......................400 Seat belt guide ........................61 Seat belt pretensioners ...........61

Seat heaters .............................301 Seating capacity ......................260 Seats

Adjustment ..............................53 Adjustment precautions ..........55 Child seats/child restraint

system installation ..............141 Cleaning................................312 Head restraint .........................58 Properly sitting in the seat.......87 Seat heaters..........................301

Service reminder indicators ..............................194

Shift lever Automatic transmission.........178 If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from P ................439 Manual transmission .............185

Shift lock system .....................439 Side airbags ...............................89 Side maker lights

Replacing light bulbs.............375 Switch ...................................222 Wattage.................................469

Side mirror Adjusting and folding...............69

Smart key system Antenna location .....................27 Entry function ..........................25 Starting the engine................166

P

R

S

527

Alphabetical index

Spare tire Inflation pressure.................. 468 Storage location ................... 425

Spark plug................................ 464 Specifications.......................... 458 Speedometer ........................... 191 Steering

Column lock release............... 67 Steering wheel

Adjustment ............................. 67 Audio switches ..................... 287 Meter control switches.......... 208

Storage feature........................ 291 Stuck

If your vehicle becomes stuck................................... 453

Sun visors................................ 296 Switch

Audio remote control switches ............................. 287

DISP switch........................ 203 Driving pattern selector

switch ................................. 180 Emergency flasher switch .... 384 Engine switch .............. 166, 175 Fog light switch..................... 228 Hazard light switch ............... 384 Ignition switch............... 166, 175 km/h MPH switch ............... 191 Light switches....................... 222 Meter control switches.......... 208 ODO/TRIP switch....... 202, 208 Power door lock

switch ................................... 43 Power window switch ............. 72 TRACK switch.................... 247 Transmission shift

switches ..................... 181, 183 VSC/TRAC off

switch ......................... 246, 247 Window lock switch ................ 72 Wiper and washer

switch ................................. 229

Tachometer Tachometer ...........................191

Tail lights Switch....................................222

Theft deterrent system Alarm.......................................82 Engine immobilizer system .....79

Theft prevention labels..............86 Tire inflation pressure .............468 Tire information

Glossary ................................480 Size .......................................477 Tire identification number......476 Uniform tire quality

grading................................478 Tires

Chains ...................................263 Checking ...............................345 Compact spare tire................425 If you have a flat tire..............425 Inflation pressure...................353 Inflation pressure sensor.......345 Information ............................474 Replacing ..............................425 Rotating tires .........................345 Size .......................................468 Snow tires .............................261 Spare tire...............................425 Tire pressure warning

system ................................400 Tools .........................................425 Towing

Dinghy towing........................266 Emergency towing.................386

TRAC.........................................245 TRACK mode ........................247 Traction control........................245

T

528

Alphabetical index

Transmission shift switches .........................181, 183

Trip meter .........................200, 219 Trunk

Opener ....................................46 Trunk light

Wattage.................................469 Turn signal lights

Switch....................................188

USB port ...................................286

Vanity mirrors...........................297 Vehicle identification

number ...................................459 Vehicle stability control...........245 VSC............................................245

Warning buzzers Electric power steering..........398 Seat belt reminder.................400 Smart key system..........410, 414

Warning lights Automatic headlight

leveling system ...................398 Automatic transmission

fluid temperature warning light........................400

Anti-lock brake system ................................398

Brake assist system ..............398 Brake system ........................396 Charging system ...................397 Cruise control

indicator light.......................398 Electric power steering

system warning light ...........398 Electronic engine control

system ................................398

Engine oil pressure ...............397 High engine coolant

temperature ........................397 Low fuel level ........................400 Low tire pressure ..................400 Malfunction indicator

lamp....................................398 Master warning light..............400 Open door .............................400 Pretensioners........................398 Seat belt reminder

light .....................................400 Slip indicator light..................398 Smart key system .........410, 414 SRS airbags..........................398 Tire pressure warning

system ................................400 Warning messages ..................408 Washer

Checking ...............................343 Preparing and checking

before winter.......................261 Switch ...................................229

Washing and waxing ...............308 Weight

Cargo capacity ......................256 Load limits.............................260 Weight...................................458

Wheels ......................................357 Window glasses ........................72 Window lock switch...................72 Windows

Power windows.......................72 Rear window defogger ..........284 Washer..................................229

Windshield wipers ...................229 Winter driving tips ...................261 Wireless remote control key

Locking/Unlocking...................38 Replacing the battery ............363 Wireless remote control key....38

U

V

W

529

What to do if...

What to do if...

A tire punctures P. 425 If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start P. 436 If the engine will not start P. 79 Engine immobilizer system

P. 445 If the battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be moved out

P. 439 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

The engine coolant temperature gauge enters the red zone (vehi- cles with a monochrome multi-information display)

The high engine coolant temperature warning light flashes or illuminates (vehicles with a color multi-information display)

Steam can be seen coming from under the hood

P. 450 If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost P. 440 If you lose your keys

The battery runs out P. 445 If the battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked P. 43 Doors

The horn begins to sound P. 82 Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in mud or sand

P. 453 If the vehicle becomes stuck

530

What to do if...

Instrument cluster

Center panel

A warning light or indicator light comes on

P. 396 If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Vehicles with a monochrome multi-information display

Vehicles with a color multi-information display

531

What to do if...

Warning lights

P. 410, 414 or

P. 396 P. 398

P. 397 P. 398

P. 397 P. 398

P. 397 P. 400

P. 400 or

P. 398 P. 400

P. 398 P. 400

P. 400 or

P. 398 P. 400

P. 398 P. 400

*1: The light flashes or illuminates in red to indicate a malfunction. *2: The light comes on in yellow to indicate a malfunction.

Brake system warning light

Smart key system indicator light

Slip indicator

Charging system warn- ing light

Automatic headlight leveling sys- tem warning light

Low engine oil pressure warning light

Cruise control indicator light*2

High engine coolant temperature warning light*1

Open door warning light

Malfunction indicator lamp

Low fuel level warning light

Drivers seat belt reminder light

SRS warning light Front passengers seat belt reminder light

ABS warning light Tire pressure warning light

Automatic transmission fluid tem- perature warning light

Electric power steering warning light

Master warning light

532

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Auxiliary catch lever P. 327

Trunk opener P. 46

Hood lock release lever P. 327

Fuel filler door P. 75

Tire inflation pressure P. 468

Fuel filler door opener P. 75

Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 13.2 gal. (50 L, 11.0 Imp. gal.)

Fuel type Unleaded gasoline only P. 76, 461 Cold tire inflation pressure P. 468

Engine oil capacity (Drain and refill reference)

qt. (L, Imp. qt.) Witho

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the 86 Toyota works, you can view and download the Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Toyota 86 as well as other Toyota manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Toyota 86. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Toyota 86 2020 Sports Car Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.